NeuraSection User

Guide (2020)

Copyright © 2021 Neuralog

 Table of Contents
Copyright / Disclaimer / Last Updated..................................................................................... 9
1 Getting Started ................................................................................................................... 10
1.1 What is NeuraSection?................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Working with Raster Images ........................................................................................... 11
1.3 SQL Installation and Connectivity .................................................................................... 13
1.4 Starting NeuraSection .................................................................................................... 24
1.5 NeuraSection Projects and File Structure ......................................................................... 25
1.5.1 NeuraSection Projects and File Structure .................................................................. 25
1.5.2 Opening and Creating Projects................................................................................. 27
1.6 Opening Projects and Files............................................................................................. 29
1.7 Online Help, Email Support, and Checking for Latest Updates ............................................ 29
2 NeuraSection Interface ....................................................................................................... 30
2.1 Startup Screen .............................................................................................................. 30
2.2 Project Explorer............................................................................................................. 31
2.3 Open and Import Options................................................................................................ 31
2.4 Export Options .............................................................................................................. 33
2.5 Image Caching .............................................................................................................. 34
2.6 Main Application Window ............................................................................................... 36
2.7 Ribbons........................................................................................................................ 36
2.7.1 File Menu............................................................................................................... 37
2.7.2 Home Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 37
2.7.3 Project Map Ribbon................................................................................................. 38
2.7.4 Area of Interest (AOI) Ribbon ................................................................................... 38
2.7.5 Well / Logs Ribbon ................................................................................................. 38
2.7.6 Correlation Ribbon.................................................................................................. 39
2.7.7 Cross-Section Ribbon ............................................................................................. 40
2.7.8 Help Ribbon ........................................................................................................... 40
2.7.9 About NeuraSection ................................................................................................ 40
2.8 Global Data Editors........................................................................................................ 41
2.8.1 Well Header........................................................................................................... 42
2.8.2 Tops ..................................................................................................................... 42
2.8.3 File Paths .............................................................................................................. 43
2.9 Preferences - Default Settings......................................................................................... 44
2.9.1 Application Default Settings ..................................................................................... 45
2.9.2 Project Default Settings ........................................................................................... 47
2.9.3 Well Information Default Settings ............................................................................. 48
2.9.4 Single Log Display Default Settings .......................................................................... 49
2.9.5 Single Log Display Default Settings .......................................................................... 50
2.9.6 Cross Section Default Settings ................................................................................. 51
2.9.7 Mapping Default Settings ......................................................................................... 51
3 Neuralog Desktop - ArcMap Interface Preview ..................................................................... 53
3.1 Desktop as Add-In Tool in ArcMap Application.................................................................. 53
3.2 Neuralog Desktop's Main Features .................................................................................. 54
3.2.1 The Tree Views ...................................................................................................... 55
3.2.2 The Desktop Grids.................................................................................................. 56
3.2.3 The Well Grid ........................................................................................................ 57
3.2.4 Column Grouping ................................................................................................... 60
3.2.5 The Logs/Documents Grid....................................................................................... 61

1
 3.2.6 The Well Information Grid ....................................................................................... 64
3.2.7 ArcMap Tools......................................................................................................... 65
3.2.8 NeuraSection Tools ................................................................................................ 67
3.3 Filter Wells Query Options............................................................................................. 69
3.4 Filter Wells Query from Top Menu .................................................................................. 73
3.5 Graphical Well Directional Survey ................................................................................... 74
3.6 NeuraSection Workflows within Neuralog Desktop............................................................ 75
3.6.1 Switching Projects between SQL and Access ............................................................ 76
3.6.2 Save and Change Projects....................................................................................... 77
3.6.3 Import/Export Well Data and Interpretations............................................................... 79
3.6.3 (a) Import Well Data........................................................................................... 79
3.6.3 (b) Export Well Data ........................................................................................... 82
3.6.4 Globally Update Wells Headers, File Paths, and Bottom Hole Locations....................... 85
3.6.5 Add/Delete Wells/Logs via Global Editor ................................................................... 88
3.6.6 Select Wells via Map, Queries and Area Trees .......................................................... 95
3.6.6 (a) Select Wells via Map ...................................................................................... 95
3.6.6 (b) Select Wells using Area Trees ......................................................................... 96
3.6.6 (c) Select Wells using Search/Queries ................................................................... 99
1.1.1.1.1. 3.6.6 (c) (1) Search Wells By UWI(s) ......................................................... 100
1.1.1.1.2. 3.6.6 (c) (2) Search Wells by Name Number ............................................... 101
1.1.1.1.3. 3.6.6 (c) (3) Search Logs by UWI(s)........................................................... 102
1.1.1.1.4. 3.6.6 (c) (4) Advanced Well Search............................................................ 104
3.6.7 Select Wells/Logs for Quick Correlation and Review .................................................. 105
3.6.8 Create, Open, and Preview Cross Sections ............................................................... 108
3.6.9 Create and Open Areas of Interest (AOIs) ................................................................. 112
3.6.10 Add/View Log(s) and Document(s) to a Well ........................................................... 114
3.6.11 Create and Use Workspaces ................................................................................. 119
3.6.12 Update Layout/Displays ......................................................................................... 123
3.6.12 (a) Update Area Tree Display ............................................................................. 123
3.6.12 (b) Update Well Spots Display............................................................................ 125
3.6.12 (c) Update Cross Section/AOI Displays ................................................................ 125
3.6.12 (d) Update Map Layers Display ........................................................................... 126
3.6.12 (e) Manage Main Application Windows ................................................................ 127
3.6.13 Set Preferences .................................................................................................... 129
3.6.13 (a) Set Top Interpreters..................................................................................... 130
3.6.13 (b) Set Interpreter Alias..................................................................................... 130
3.6.13 (c) Manage Well Log Types ................................................................................ 131
3.6.13 (d) Manage Well Document Types ...................................................................... 133
3.6.14 Manage Strat Panel............................................................................................... 135
3.6.15 Filter Wells Query using NeuraSection Tool ............................................................ 135
4 Add New Well + Logs to the Database ................................................................................. 137
5 Import Data......................................................................................................................... 138
5.1 Well/Log Data Import ..................................................................................................... 138
5.1.1 Generic Ascii and Excel Loader (.txt, .xls, and more) .................................................. 140
5.1.2 GCS Well and Top File (.gcs) .................................................................................. 144
5.1.3 GeoGraphix WellBase V2 (.asc, .txt files) .................................................................. 151
5.1.4 GeoGraphix WellBase V3 (.wb3, .asc., .txt files)......................................................... 158
5.1.5 GeoGraphix WellBase V4 (.wb4, .txt files) ................................................................. 165
5.1.6 IHS Energy Well Fixed 197 (.PID or .d97) .................................................................. 171
5.1.7 IHS Energy Well Fixed 297 (.97f).............................................................................. 178
5.1.8 IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File (.98f)....................................................................... 185

2
 5.1.9 MMS Offshore Directional Survey (.txt files) ............................................................... 191
5.1.10 Shape File Well Spots (.shp).................................................................................. 198
5.1.11 Tobin WCS File (.wcs) .......................................................................................... 203
5.1.12 GCS Log Image Files (.mdb, .MDB) ........................................................................ 209
5.1.13 GeoGraphix Depth Registration ASCII Files ............................................................. 216
5.1.14 IHS Energy XML Depth Registration........................................................................ 218
5.1.15 MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs .................................................................................. 219
5.1.16 MMS Log CD (.html and .htm files).......................................................................... 227
5.1.17 NeuraLog (NLGX) File (.nlgx, .nlg, .wlg) .................................................................. 234
5.1.18 NeuraLog (NLGX) File Directory Batch Load............................................................ 237
5.1.19 PETRA Log Image Calibration Files ........................................................................ 239
5.1.20 TGS (A2D) smartRASTER (.txt files)....................................................................... 241
5.1.21 TGS (A2D) SIF Files ............................................................................................. 242
5.1.22 LAS File Loader (Batch)......................................................................................... 243
5.1.23 TIFF File Loader (Batch)........................................................................................ 246
5.1.24 Extra Options for NL Desktop ................................................................................. 248
5.1.24.1 Custom Table ................................................................................................. 248
5.1.24.2 Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch).......................................................... 252
5.1.24.3 Well Document Loader (Batch) ........................................................................ 255
5.1.24.4 Field Documents (ASCII/Excel) ........................................................................ 257
5.1.24.5 Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel) .................................................................. 260
5.1.24.6 Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel)................................................................... 263
5.1.24.7 Country Documents (ASCII/Excel).................................................................... 266
5.1.24.8 Region Documents (ASCII/Excel) ..................................................................... 269
5.1.24.9 Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel) .......................................................... 272
5.2 Map Data...................................................................................................................... 275
5.3 Well Logs ..................................................................................................................... 278
5.3.1 Log Images ............................................................................................................ 278
5.3.2 LAS Files ............................................................................................................... 280
5.3.3 Custom Curve Data................................................................................................. 281
5.3.3.1 Curve Data...................................................................................................... 282
5.3.3.2 Step Curve Data .............................................................................................. 285
5.3.4 LAS Templates....................................................................................................... 289
5.3.5 LAS Properties ....................................................................................................... 293
6 Online Data Source(s) ......................................................................................................... 295
7 Export Data ........................................................................................................................ 296
8 Open Log List View............................................................................................................. 297
9 Set Well Log Properties ...................................................................................................... 299
9.1 Well Header Tab ........................................................................................................... 299
9.2 Display Tab .................................................................................................................. 300
9.3 Log File(s) Tab.............................................................................................................. 301
9.4 Deviation Tab................................................................................................................ 302
9.5 Markers Tab ................................................................................................................. 303
9.6 Production Display Tab .................................................................................................. 304
9.7 Production Data Tab ...................................................................................................... 305
9.8 Monthly Production Tab.................................................................................................. 306
9.9 Sand Display Tab .......................................................................................................... 307
9.10 Log Text Tab............................................................................................................... 308
9.11 LAS Display Tab.......................................................................................................... 309
9.12 Depth Track Properties................................................................................................. 311
9.13 LAS Fills Tab............................................................................................................... 313

3
 9.14 Remarks Tab .............................................................................................................. 319
10 Setting Top Interpreters .................................................................................................... 321
10.1 To Set Top Interpreters Priority...................................................................................... 321
10.2 Setting or Deleting Interpreter Alias................................................................................ 322
11 Working with Well Logs .................................................................................................... 326
11.1 Arrange Well Log Windows........................................................................................... 326
11.2 Scroll and Zoom Well Log Windows............................................................................... 328
11.2.1 Scrolling / Zooming Individual Logs ......................................................................... 328
11.2.2 Scrolling / Zooming ALL Logs Together................................................................... 329
11.3 Depth Register Log Images........................................................................................... 331
11.3.1 Calibrating Image Files.......................................................................................... 332
11.3.2 Depth Marker Properties ........................................................................................ 334
11.3.3 Calibrating Logs with Multiple Runs ........................................................................ 335
11.3.4 Calibration of LAS Files ......................................................................................... 336
11.4 Crop Well Logs............................................................................................................ 337
11.4.1 To Crop a Log Image............................................................................................. 337
11.4.2 Logs with Multiple Runs ......................................................................................... 338
11.4.3 Skewed Logs........................................................................................................ 339
11.4.4 Cropping Log Tracks ............................................................................................. 339
11.4.5 Cropping LAS Files ............................................................................................... 339
11.5 Marking Tops and Bases .............................................................................................. 340
11.5.1 Mark Tops Manually .............................................................................................. 340
11.5.2 Mark Bases Manually............................................................................................. 344
11.5.3 Tips for Picking/Editing Tops.................................................................................. 347
11.5.4 Top Properties...................................................................................................... 347
11.5.5 Strat Panel (Project Level Surface Table) ................................................................ 350
11.5.6 Delete Tops (from the database) ............................................................................ 351
11.6 Marking Faults............................................................................................................. 353
11.6.1 Marking Faults ...................................................................................................... 354
11.6.2 Fault Marker Properties ......................................................................................... 354
11.6.3 Delete Faults (from the database)........................................................................... 355
11.7 Manually Add/Edit Deviation Survey .............................................................................. 357
11.8 Manually Add/Edit Production Test Data......................................................................... 360
11.8.1 Quick Production Test Accelerator.......................................................................... 361
11.8.2 Perforations (PERF) .............................................................................................. 361
11.8.3 PERF Properties................................................................................................... 363
11.8.4 PERF List ............................................................................................................ 365
11.8.5 Drill Stem Tests (DST) .......................................................................................... 366
11.8.6 DST Properties..................................................................................................... 367
11.8.7 DST List .............................................................................................................. 370
11.8.8 Initial Potential (IP) ................................................................................................ 371
11.8.9 IP Properties ........................................................................................................ 372
11.8.10 IP List ................................................................................................................. 375
11.8.11 Core Data (CORE) ............................................................................................... 376
11.8.12 CORE Properties ................................................................................................. 377
11.8.13 CORE List........................................................................................................... 380
11.8.14 Shows (SHOW) ................................................................................................... 381
11.8.15 SHOW Properties ................................................................................................ 382
11.8.16 SHOW List.......................................................................................................... 385
11.9 Zone Fills.................................................................................................................... 386
11.10 Create a Proposed (or Empty) Well.............................................................................. 388

4
 11.11 Delete Well(s)............................................................................................................ 389
11.12 Delete Image/LAS ...................................................................................................... 390
11.13 Log Coverage............................................................................................................ 391
12 Log Correlation................................................................................................................. 395
12.1 Correlation Mode ......................................................................................................... 395
12.2 Tie Log ....................................................................................................................... 395
12.3 Select Logs to Correlate Panel ....................................................................................... 397
12.4 Quick Cross Section .................................................................................................... 398
12.5 Scroll To Panel ............................................................................................................ 398
12.6 Strat Bar and Interpreters.............................................................................................. 399
12.6.1 The Strat Bar........................................................................................................ 399
12.6.2 Interpreters Button ................................................................................................ 400
12.6.3 Right-Click Options ............................................................................................... 401
12.7 Lock on Surface and Compress/Stretch Log Mode .......................................................... 401
12.8 Post Surface ............................................................................................................... 403
13 Additional Well Log Tools and Features ............................................................................ 408
13.1 Input Well Header Manually .......................................................................................... 408
13.2 Add TIFF/LAS to Existing Wells..................................................................................... 409
13.3 Log Type Manager ....................................................................................................... 412
13.4 Annotations & Graphic Overlays.................................................................................... 414
13.4.1 Annotate Well Logs............................................................................................... 414
13.4.2 Annotation Properties ............................................................................................ 416
13.4.3 Adding Graphics ................................................................................................... 418
13.4.4 Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set ...................................................... 418
13.4.5 Freeform Drawing ................................................................................................. 419
14 Net Count (Sand Count) .................................................................................................... 421
14.1 Create and Set Properties............................................................................................. 421
14.2 Display ALL Net Counts (Sands) as Zones ..................................................................... 423
14.3 Align, Set Width, and/or Change Color of Selected Data Type .......................................... 428
14.4 Sand Display Tab ........................................................................................................ 429
15 Trace Correlation .............................................................................................................. 433
15.1 Using the Trace Correlation Tool ................................................................................... 433
15.2 Correlating with a Curve Trace...................................................................................... 435
15.3 Trace Correlation Properties ......................................................................................... 435
16 Checking/Adjusting Your Work ......................................................................................... 438
16.1 Checking Depth, Top, & Fault Event Markers.................................................................. 438
16.2 Set/Change Draw Order for Any Selected Object ............................................................ 438
16.3 Checking Correlations of Events across All Logs............................................................. 441
17 Export Well Data ............................................................................................................... 442
18 Well Data Export Options .................................................................................................. 443
18.1 Export ALL Wells in Project........................................................................................... 444
18.2 Export SELECTED Well(s)............................................................................................ 445
18.3 Export SELECTED Cross Section(s).............................................................................. 446
18.4 Export Wells from Selection in Project Map or Area of Interest (AOI) ................................. 447
18.5 Export TEMPLATES for Strat Panel and Log Type Table.................................................. 450
18.6 Export TEMPLATES for Custom Table ........................................................................... 450
19 Export File Types.............................................................................................................. 453
19.1 GCS Well and Top....................................................................................................... 453
19.2 GeoGraphix WellBase V2............................................................................................. 455
19.3 GeoGraphix WellBase V3............................................................................................. 457

5
 19.4 GeoGraphix WellBase V4............................................................................................. 459
19.5 Generic ASCII ............................................................................................................. 461
19.6 MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File ................................................................................... 463
19.7 NeuraSection Project (Database) Export ........................................................................ 465
19.7.1 Export to New Project (Database) ........................................................................... 465
19.7.2 Export to Existing NeuraSection Project................................................................... 470
19.8 NeuraWell XML ........................................................................................................... 472
19.9 Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003 ................................................................................ 473
19.10 GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1........................................................................................... 475
20 Open Existing Wells.......................................................................................................... 477
20.1 Project Map Well Selection ........................................................................................... 477
20.2 Area of Interest Well Selection ...................................................................................... 478
20.3 Well Choice Grid ......................................................................................................... 478
21 Working with Cross Sections ............................................................................................ 481
21.1 Create & Save a Cross Section ..................................................................................... 481
21.1.1 Creating a Cross Section ....................................................................................... 481
21.1.2 Saving a Cross Section.......................................................................................... 486
21.1.3 Viewing & Working with Well Logs + Cross Sections Together .................................. 487
21.2 Cross Section Properties .............................................................................................. 487
21.2.1 Cross Section Layout (Properties Tab) .................................................................... 488
21.2.2 Cross Section Title Block (Title Block Tab) .............................................................. 490
21.2.3 Cross Section Display Settings (Options Tab) .......................................................... 491
21.2.4 Cross Section Borders (Borders Tab)...................................................................... 494
21.2.5 Cross Section Well Order/Information (Well Info Tab)............................................... 495
21.3 XWell Documents ........................................................................................................ 496
21.3.1 XWell Well Header Display (Well Header Tab) ........................................................ 497
21.3.2 XWell Data Sources (Log File(s) Tab)..................................................................... 499
21.4 Presentation Formatting ............................................................................................... 502
21.4.1 Connecting Tops & Filling Well Zones .................................................................... 503
21.4.2 Removing or Hiding Connecting Tops & Zone Fills ................................................... 505
21.4.3 Connecting Related Faults ..................................................................................... 507
21.4.4 Structural View and Stratigraphic View .................................................................... 508
21.4.5 Deviated Well Display ........................................................................................... 509
21.4.6 Selectively Post Existing Tops on Cross Section....................................................... 510
21.4.7 Depth Scale Properties.......................................................................................... 511
21.4.8 Distance Marker Properties .................................................................................... 512
21.5 Add Additional Wells to a Cross Section......................................................................... 513
21.6 Cross Section Interpretation and Montage ...................................................................... 514
21.6.1 Top Profile ........................................................................................................... 515
21.6.2 Top Profile Properties............................................................................................ 517
21.6.3 Top Marker........................................................................................................... 518
21.6.4 Top Marker Properties ........................................................................................... 519
21.6.5 Fault Profile.......................................................................................................... 521
21.6.6 Fault Profile Properties .......................................................................................... 523
21.6.7 Fault Marker ......................................................................................................... 524
21.6.8 Fault Marker Properties ......................................................................................... 524
21.6.9 Breaking Top Profiles at Faults............................................................................... 525
21.6.10 Unconformities ................................................................................................... 527
21.6.11 Facies / Freeform................................................................................................ 528
21.6.12 Annotate Cross Sections...................................................................................... 530
21.6.13 Annotation Properties .......................................................................................... 532

6
 21.6.14 Add Graphics / Custom Lithologies ....................................................................... 534
21.7 Create and Work with Multiple Cross Sections................................................................ 538
21.8 Metric Cross Sections .................................................................................................. 539
21.9 Open Existing Cross Sections ....................................................................................... 540
21.9.1 Cross Section Choice Grid..................................................................................... 540
21.9.2 Map View ............................................................................................................. 543
21.9.3 Area of Interest ..................................................................................................... 544
21.10 Printing a Cross Section ............................................................................................. 545
21.10.1 To Print a Cross Section ...................................................................................... 545
21.10.2 HP DesignJet Plotter Printer................................................................................. 547
21.10.3 NLI RTL Driver.................................................................................................... 547
21.10.4 Print to JPEG or TIFF .......................................................................................... 548
21.10.5 Troubleshooting Printing ...................................................................................... 549
21.10.6 Copy/Paste to Any Windows Application................................................................ 550
21.11 Export Log Images ..................................................................................................... 550
21.11.1 Export Normalized Images Directly from Cross Section ........................................... 550
21.12 Delete a Cross Section ............................................................................................... 553
21.13 Cross Section Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 555
22 Project Map ...................................................................................................................... 557
22.1 To Open Project Map ................................................................................................... 558
22.2 Filter Wells Dialog ....................................................................................................... 559
22.3 Map View Display Options ............................................................................................ 559
22.4 Well Display................................................................................................................ 561
22.5 Map Layers ................................................................................................................. 563
22.6 Map Display Projection................................................................................................. 565
22.7 Map View Tips............................................................................................................. 566
22.8 Right-Click Options for Wells and Cross Section Lines .................................................... 566
23 Area of Interest (AOI) - Gridless Mapping........................................................................... 570
23.1 Create Area of Interest (AOI) ......................................................................................... 570
23.2 Define Area of Interest (AOI) ......................................................................................... 571
23.3 Set Area of Interest (AOI) Properties (Map Properties Dialog) ........................................... 572
23.3.1 Well Display Tab .................................................................................................. 572
23.3.2 Map Layers Tab.................................................................................................... 574
23.3.3 Map Display Projection Tab.................................................................................... 576
23.3.4 Area Tab.............................................................................................................. 577
23.3.5 Title Block Tab ..................................................................................................... 578
23.4 Add Surface Map(s) ..................................................................................................... 579
23.4.1 Adding a Surface Map Layer to an AOI .................................................................... 580
23.4.2 Contour Properties ................................................................................................ 586
23.4.3 Surface Tree Structure .......................................................................................... 587
23.5 Add Fault Map(s) (of Fault Surfaces).............................................................................. 588
23.6 Add and Edit Faults (Fault Lines on Surface Map) ........................................................... 590
23.6.1 Faults - Drawing ................................................................................................... 591
23.6.1.1 Simple Faults.................................................................................................. 591
23.6.6.2 Thrown Faults ................................................................................................ 593
23.6.2 Faults - Editing ..................................................................................................... 595
23.6.3 Fault Properties .................................................................................................... 596
23.6.4 Throw/Dip/Heave Properties .................................................................................. 598
23.6.5 Add Boxcar, Thrust, and/or Slip Symbols ................................................................. 599
23.6.6 Adjusting Contours around Faults ........................................................................... 602
23.7 Contouring .................................................................................................................. 603

7
 23.7.1 Contour Properties - Individual Contour ................................................................... 603
23.7.2 Contour Helper ..................................................................................................... 605
23.7.3 Contours - Drawing ............................................................................................... 606
23.7.4 Contours - Editing ................................................................................................. 608
23.7.5 Quick Contouring (Fill Between Contouring)............................................................. 612
23.7.6 Contours - Breaking & Slipping Along Faults ............................................................ 614
23.7.7 Contour QC Tool .................................................................................................. 617
23.8 Generate Map(s) .......................................................................................................... 617
23.9 Merge AOI Maps.......................................................................................................... 619
23.10 Volumetrics ............................................................................................................... 621
23.10.1 Calculate Contour Areas ...................................................................................... 622
23.10.2 Calculate Oil and Gas Volumes ............................................................................ 622
23.10.3 Calculate Estimated Reserves .............................................................................. 624
23.11 Remove Map ............................................................................................................. 626
23.12 Print an Area of Interest (AOI) Map............................................................................... 626
23.13 Open Existing Area of Interest (AOI)............................................................................. 628
23.14 Delete Area of Interest ................................................................................................ 630
23.15 Export Map Data ........................................................................................................ 631
24 Managing Projects/Database............................................................................................. 634
24.1 Saving Your Work........................................................................................................ 634
24.2 Switching Projects/Databases ....................................................................................... 636
24.3 Deleting a Project ........................................................................................................ 638
24.4 Backup Database (Access/SQL) ................................................................................... 639
24.5 Compact and Repair Database (Access) ........................................................................ 641
25 Reference ......................................................................................................................... 642
25.1 Ribbons ...................................................................................................................... 642
25.2 Hot Keys..................................................................................................................... 644
25.3 Neuralog Desktop ........................................................................................................ 647
25.4 Depth Registering Log Images ...................................................................................... 648
25.5 Crop Well Logs............................................................................................................ 649
25.6 Cross Sections ............................................................................................................ 650
25.7 Tops, Bases, and Faults ............................................................................................... 652
25.8 Adding Deviation Surveys............................................................................................. 656
25.9 Adding Production Test Data......................................................................................... 657
25.10 Zone Fills & Interwell Zones ........................................................................................ 659
25.11 Annotations & Graphic Overlays .................................................................................. 661
25.12 Net Count (Sand Count).............................................................................................. 664
25.13 Trace Correlation ....................................................................................................... 674
25.14 Project Maps & Areas of Interest (AOIs)........................................................................ 675
25.15 UWI/API Formatting.................................................................................................... 677
25.16 Troubleshooting Startup.............................................................................................. 679
25.17 License Key # and Type Display.................................................................................. 680
26 Technical Support............................................................................................................. 682

8
Copyright / Disclaimer / Last Updated
© 2021 Neuralog
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means -
graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information
storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered
trademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these
trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and
the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the
use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code
that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of
profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or
indirectly by this document.
Last Update: January 12, 2021.

9
1 Getting Started

WELCOME TO NEURASECTION
2020 USER GUIDE

The following subsections will help you quickly get started with NeuraSection.
In addition, you will get a brief introduction to some of NeuraSection's special features.

1.1 What is NeuraSection?

What is NeuraSection?
NeuraSection allows users to correlate, interpret, and display all data types at their
disposal. This capability maximizes resources and minimizes the time required to create and
present a total play concept. Raster and LAS logs can be scaled, correlated, and interpreted
faster and less expensively than paper or digital-only methods only. Rapid mapping and quality
control tools are integrated. The use of native and common formats - combined with any other
E&P system - provides IT integration that generates superior workflow efficiency. Interactive
connectivity to outside data stores, such as MJ LogSleuth, allows users to access subscription
data seamlessly.

Helpful User Interface

NeuraSection can use LAS files, PDF Files, TIFF images, and depth-calibrated rasters
from the industry's data providers - along with output from all other Neuralog products.
Users can rapidly display, interpret, and present data in a unique linked multi-window
environment. Information added or changed is automatically reflected in all views and can be
shared among projects.
In structural cross sections, rasters and LAS files may be displayed along the deviated wellbore
path. Statigraphic cross sections are generated automatically, and they come with an option to
display missing intervals.
NeuraSection imports any v1.2, v2.0, or v3.0 LAS file. These files may be created by
digitizing files with NeuraLog - or they may come from any other source. Images used in

10
NeuraSection are scanned Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) files that display directly on the
computer screen.
The portable NeuraScanner is ideal for obtaining TIFF images from your paper well logs, but
any scanner or logs scanned by a scanning service will work. In addition, calibrated log images
purchased from MJLogSleuth, IHS Markit, TGS, and/or LMKR Geographix can be imported to
save setup time.
Rapid interpretation mapping in NeuraSection allows the creation of presentation-quality
structural maps faster than any other method. Users can map multiple surfaces within a single
Area of Interest. NeuraSection frees the geoscientist from the burden of adjusting and selecting
gridding parameters and algorithms to make a map. The geoscientist can freely draw on-screen
contours and faults that directly link to related cross sections - as well as post existing surface
and fault data.
QC map tools ensure map quality and agreement with structural sections. Maps may be
auto-loaded into other systems.
NeuraSection has complete montaging capabilities. Logs, maps, sections and other
graphics can be easily displayed and sent to any printer/plotter or saved as TIFF or JPEG files.

Supported Platforms
NeuraSection operates on Windows 10/8/7/XP, and connectivity to UNIX is available via
interactive links to OpenWorks and Finder. Installation notes are available from the Support
Page, as well as provided with your copy of NeuraSection. These notes will cover steps for
installing software and licenses in all environments.

1.2 Working with Raster Images

The images used by NeuraSection can be produced with practically any scanner. The following
sections provide more information about images, as well as suggestions for scanners and
scanning.

Image Resolution: Dots per Inch (DPI)

Neuralog recommends a scanning resolution of 200 dots per inch (dpi). Lower resolutions
(e.g., 72 dpi) may cause the speed of automatic digitizing to suffer. Moreover, you may not be
able to read all information on the log image. Resolutions greater than 200 dpi may be used,
but this creates larger files that increase space requirements.

Image Compression
All Neuralog products work with PDF, BMP, JPEG, and both compressed and
uncompressed TIFF images. For TIFFs, compressed formats are recommended (for B/W,
Group 4 compression; for Grayscale/Color, LZW compression).

11
Color and Grayscale Images
NeuraSection will load both color and grayscale images. In addition, color can be added to
images from within NeuraSection by picking tops and filling zones of interest. NeuraView may
be used to convert color or grayscale images to black and white. For more information, visit our
website, www.neuralog.com.

.BMP Files
NeuraSection imports this file as a TIFF.

Schlumberger PDS Files

To open this kind of file, go to NeuraView to convert it. NeuraView opens the file as a TIFF.
After saving as a TIFF, you can import it into NeuraSection.

Adobe PDF Files (Single & Multi-Page)

NeuraSection imports this file as a TIFF.

EMF and EMZ Files

To open such a file, go to NeuraView to convert it. NeuraView opens the file as a TIFF. After
saving as a TIFF, you can import it into NeuraSection.

CGM Files
NeuraSection imports this file as a TIFF.

Large or Long Images

The size of images readable by NeuraSection is limited only by the available disk space.
NeuraSection loads only the needed portion of an image at any time. This allows Neuralog
imaging to work very quickly and to work with very large images.

Recommended Scanners
Neuralog offers the NeuraScanner, a high-end performance continuous log scanner designed
specifically for well logs.

Cropping Images with NeuraView or NeuraSection

If your images are oversized - for example, containing too much white space - you may
choose to crop them using NeuraView. With NeuraView, you can select any rectangular
sub-portion of an image and save out that sub-image. This allows you to have smaller images,
resulting in less storage space. You can also splice sections from multiple images into one.
In addition, you can 'virtually' crop and de-skew images within NeuraSection. This approach
affects only the presentation of the image in the cross section; this way, the original TIFF
image is preserved. Still, they can be printed as TIFF or JPEG files for use in NeuraLog.
For more information about NeuraView and NeuraSection, please contact Neuralog, or visit
www.neuralog.com.

12
Recommended Printers
NeuraLaserColor is a high-speed, high-resolution desktop laser printer for both well logs and
standard pages. High-quality log prints are readily produced with laser sharpness. Well reports
and other office documents can also be printed - making this not only economic for printing
logs, but also providing a single desktop laser solution for your office.

1.3 SQL Installation and Connectivity

SQL Express Installation for Neuralog Products:

· Download
· License Terms
· Install Rules
· Feature Selection
· Instance Configuration
· Server Configuration
· Database Engine Configuration
· Completing the Installation

Download
Download the latest version of Microsoft SQL Server Express edition.

When you open the downloaded file, you will be asked to select an installation type. Click
“Download Media”. Afterward, you'll be asked which package you want to download. "Express
Core" should be enough.

13
14
The installation files will be downloaded as an executable. Double click on the executable. You'll
be asked to choose a directory for the extracted files. The default directory should be fine.

Afterward, the program will launch the SQL Server Installation Center.

15
NOTE: Neuralog Desktop requires installing Microsoft.NET Framework 4.0 or later.

License Terms
Select “New SQL Server stand-alone installation or add features to an existing
installation”. Accept the License Terms. Click Next.

16
The installer should go through "Global Rules", "Product Updates", and "Install Setup Files"
without a problem.
"Global Rules" identifies problems that might occur when you install the SQL Server Setup
support files. Failures must be corrected before setup can continue.
(If a problem arises, follow Microsoft's directions - such as the directions the installer gives.
For example, in "Global Rules", you may be told you need to restart the computer. Afterward,
you must re-start the installation process.)

Install Rules
Under "Install Rules", you might get a warning about the Windows Firewall. In that case, by
"Windows Firewall", click "Warning".

17
A dialog will pop up. According to the dialog, to allow remote access, you must be sure the
appropriate ports are open. Click OK.

If you wish to, address the warning before continuing (see Microsoft's instructions, which the
dialog links to). Otherwise, just click Next.
The installer should go through "Feature Rules" without a problem. (If a problem arises, follow
Microsoft's directions - such as the directions the installer gives.)

Feature Selection
18
Select the Express features to install. The default settings should be good enough.
Click Next.

Instance Configuration
Specify the name and instance ID (see important note below) for the instance of SQL Server.
The Instance ID becomes part of the installation path. Afterward, click Next.
IMPORTANT: Neuralog products require an Instance Name to connect to SQL Server
databases. The Instance Name must be unique (i.e., something that does not already
appear in the table of “Installed instances”).

19
Server Configuration
Specify the service accounts and the collation configuration. Click Next.

20
Database Engine Configuration
Under "Database Engine Configuration", specify the Authentication Mode (see important note
below). Also specify the SQL Server Administrators and the Data Directories. Then click Next.
IMPORTANT: Neuralog products require “Windows authentication mode” to connect to SQL
Server databases.

21
Completing the Installation
Once you've begun the installation, it will take several minutes to complete.
The installer should go through "Feature Configuration Rules" and "Installation Progress"
without a problem. (If a problem arises, follow Microsoft's directions - such as the directions
the installer gives. For example, during "Installation Progress", you may be told to restart the
machine and then re-launch the installer. To follow those directions, you must start by aborting
the installation.)
Once installation is complete, you will receive the following confirmation window:

22
Together with this window, you may also receive the following notice:

The SQL Express instance can now be added as an External Server, for use with Neuralog
products. To use as a local database, the default SERVER\INSTANCE name is
23
LOCALHOST\SQLEXPRESS.
Installation is now complete. Click Close. (If you received the above notice, restart your
computer, too.)

1.4 Starting NeuraSection

· From the Start menu, select Programs Neuralog NeuraSection.

OR

· Double click on the desktop shortcut.

· Once the software is started, you will see the startup screen shown below. This panel
allows you to select your current project or create a new one. From here, you can start
opening/creating Projects and opening/importing files.

24
See also:
NeuraSection Interface
Troubleshooting Startup

1.5 NeuraSection Projects and File Structure

The Neuralog project database stores information about the wells you are working with and
the cross sections you create. Each database is part of a project structure that may contain
additional information such as the well log images, LAS files, and files generated by other
Neuralog products.
This section goes into detail about Neuralog projects, their creation, and how to work with them
through the standard interface.

1.5.1 NeuraSection Projects and File Structure

All Neuralog products use the basic project directory structure shown below. Each project
contains a single database that stores information about the project. Each project also holds a
set of subdirectories for project data used or generated by other Neuralog products.

Neuralog projects are subdirectories within an upper-level folder. The default project folder is
[installation volume, e.g., C:]\nds\projects. However, you can choose whatever folder you want
to store projects.

Database File
NeuraSection uses a database file located directly within the project directory. For example,
the database file for the project xtutor will be called xtutor.mdb. This file stores all information
pertaining to your maps, well logs, and cross sections.

25
A separate database is created for each project and is stored in the project directory. For
example, if your project directory is named C:\nds\projects\MyProj, then the following database
file is created: C:\nds\projects\MyProj\MyProj.mdb.
Again, NeuraSection stores both well information and cross sections in the project database.
Thus, you may select any group of well logs from the database and create any number of cross
sections with your selected wells. Additional wells and well information may be added to the
project any time and then added to existing or new cross sections.
The figure below shows a high-level view of cross sections created with NeuraSection. Wells
can consist of any number of well logs (images and/or LAS files). The well log images / LAS
files can be used in multiple cross sections without re-entering any data.

Subdirectories
Neuralog projects allow the user to organize the various files associated with NeuraLog into
groups, such as all logs for an oil field. A Neuralog project is a folder with separate
sub-folders for the following files:
· Image Files (\img) - The \img folder is the recommended location for image files (.tif,
.tiff, .img, .MJ, .jpg, .png, .bmp, .pdf, and .cgm) within the Neuralog project structure.
o Other Neuralog applications can also access images from this folder.
o Traditionally, Neuralog products have accessed images from within the \img
subdirectory of the project (e.g., C:\nds\projects\Proj1\img\tutorial.tif). However,
NeuraLog well images may be located anywhere in your file system - such as your
local drive, a network drive or a CD-ROM.

26
 o It is recommended that you copy images to the \img subdirectory for organizational
purposes. However, you may use them directly from their original locations (and you
may browse for them).
· NeuraLog Files (\wlg) - The \wlg folder is the recommended location for .nlg/.nlgx files.
o NLG/NLGX files are also known as "working files". They are used for digitizing well
log images in NeuraLog.
o The \wlg folder is the recommended place to store NLGX files (e.g.,
C:\nds\projects\Proj1\wlg\tutorial.nlgx). But, again, you may use these files directly
from their original locations.
o NLG/NLGX files are a Neuralog proprietary format. By convention, they have the
.nlg/.nlgx filename extension (.nlg from much older versions of NeuraLog).
· Digital Log Data Files (\las) - The \las folder is the recommended location for
digitized logs. This includes LAS 1.2 and 2.0, as well as tab-delimited ASCII, AutoCad
DXF, and PETRA ASCII Well Data.
o Likewise, it is recommended that LAS files be placed in the \las subdirectory of your
project (e.g., C:\nds\projects\Proj1\las\tutorial.las). As with images, however, LAS
files can be located anywhere on your file system (and you may browse for them).
o If the LAS files were created with Neuralog's digitizing software (e.g., NeuraLog),
they are placed there by default.
· NeuraLog Plot Definition (\pdf) - The \pdf folder is the default location for plot files
used to generate other output types.
· NeuraMap Files (\nds) - The \nds folder is used for NeuraMap. An \nds directory will
be present under each of your projects. By convention, these files have the .nds
filename extension.

1.5.2 Opening and Creating Projects

To select or create a project

· In the startup panel, click the Create New Project… button: .

OR
· If you’re already in the main window, then go to the Project Explorer and right click on
the Project Folder path. Select Change Project Group….

27
· In the Select Project dialog, select the database (Access or SQL) you want to use.
· Select the desired path for the Current Project Group (click on the browse button
[“…”] ).
· To create a new project…
o This dialog has a button called Create New Project…. Click on it.
o Enter the new project name.
o Click OK. The new project is added to the Current Project list. The new project
should be automatically selected.

· In the Current Project list, select the desired project.

28
 · Keep in mind that each project can have only one project database. The database name
is derived from the project folder name and must be identical to it.
· Click OK.
· NOTICE: In the startup panel, the Active Project is now listed as the project you just
selected (e.g., if you chose NXTrain, then that is the name you will see).

1.6 Opening Projects and Files

To perform these tasks, go to Opening and Creating Projects and Import Data.

1.7 Online Help, Email Support, and Checking for Latest

Updates
These items are also just a click away: online help, email support, checking on the latest
software versions, training, and evaluation requests.
All these items can be found in the Help ribbon.

29
2 NeuraSection Interface
NeuraSection offers an interface to make your workflow convenient, intuitive, and
straightforward. For example, the Project Explorer lets you easily navigate through a list of
projects and their contents. Each basic element of the workflow has its own ribbon - such as
"Project Map", "Well / Logs", and "Cross-Section". The File menu is also conveniently organized.
Among other features, NeuraSection also offers a great variety of preferences for the
application and individual projects.
The Neuralog project database, discussed in the NeuraSection Projects and File Structure
section, stores information about the wells you are working with and the cross sections you
create. Each database is part of a project structure that may contain additional information
such as the well log images, LAS files, and files generated by other Neuralog products.

2.1 Startup Screen

When you start NeuraSection, you will see the startup screen, shown below.

30
2.2 Project Explorer
On the startup screen, you can click Project Explorer. This will transport you to the Main
Application Window - which includes the Project Explorer, on the left side of the window.

2.3 Open and Import Options

31
Open Data
Well Logs
· File Open Wells / Logs...
Project Map
· File Open Project Map...
Area of Interest (AOI)
· File Open AOIs...
Cross Section
· File Open Cross Sections...

32
Import Data
Well Information:
· File Import Well / Log Data...
Map Data:
· File Import NeuraMap Data...
Log Image(s) / LAS File(s):
· File Import Log(s)...
Curve Data:
· File Import Curve Data...

2.4 Export Options

33
Export Data
Well Information / Log Image(s):
· File Export Well / Log Data...
Map Data:
· File Export Map Data...

2.5 Image Caching

Image loading is greatly sped up with Neuralog's image cacher (available for installation on
Neuralog's Product Suite CD). With this option installed, images (.tif and .rwl) are cached
after the first time they are opened in NeuraSection and re-loaded from cache each time
following to save on load time.

To set Image Caching

· Select File Preferences.
· In the Default Settings dialog, select Application.

34
 · Select Image Caching and click Select.
· Enter the desired Cache Size (megabytes), or use the default value of 500MB.

Turning the Cache On/Off

Image Caching may be turned on/off using the Image Caching check box on the Cache
Preferences panel. It is recommended that Caching be left ON.
NOTE:
· MJ Caching is available only when using the Shared Cache option.
· Clearing Shared Cache will remove cached images for all projects in the
shared directory.

Cache Size (Megabytes)

The cache size may be adjusted via the Cache Size keyin. The default of 500MB is appropriate
unless you have limited disk space. For older systems with limited space, decrease this
number.

Shared (Public) Cache

System Administrators may want to set up a cache in a project group that everyone can use. If
several users commonly access the same images, this may be the best type of cache for the
group. Do this by selecting Shared Cache from the setup program. The setup program
creates a cache of the size you specify within your current NDS_PROJECTS. To create a
shared cache in another location, change your NDS_PROJECTS.

Local (Private ) Cache

If you are only concerned about setting up a cache for your own project images, select Local
Cache. This will create a cache to which only you write. Unless you are sharing project
images with other users, it is probably the best choice. The Private cache defaults to your temp
directory, but you can choose a different directory if needed. Just be sure that there is ample

35
room on the drive you select.
In either case a cache directory will be created of the size you specify. Frequently used images
will be stored there, causing your overall image loading performance to be greatly enhanced.

2.6 Main Application Window

(NOTE: To open the classic NeuraSection Wizard, press Alt+C.)

2.7 Ribbons
In NeuraSection's updated interface, the menu bar has been replaced with a ribbon interface.
There are eight ribbons:
· File
· Home
· Project Map
· Area of Interest (AOI)
· Well / Logs
· Correlation
· Cross-Section
· Help

36
2.7.1 File Menu

2.7.2 Home Ribbon

37
2.7.3 Project Map Ribbon

2.7.4 Area of Interest (AOI) Ribbon

2.7.5 Well / Logs Ribbon

38
NOTE: To use the items under Net-Count > Layout of Like Counts..., do the following:
· Right click on a net count. Select Sand Count Layout > Select All Like Sands.
· This will highlight all net counts of the same "Data Type".
· Now you can use the options under Net-Count > Layout of Like Counts....

2.7.6 Correlation Ribbon

39
2.7.7 Cross-Section Ribbon

2.7.8 Help Ribbon

2.7.9 About NeuraSection

In the Help ribbon, when About is selected, the About NeuraSection window is displayed, as

40
shown below. The window displays the NeuraSection application information, such as the
Active Project DB, the version, and the license.

NOTE: The “About NeuraSection” information can also be accessed by clicking File and
selecting Info.

2.8 Global Data Editors

41
Well Headers, tops, and file-path data can be edited or updated from a global perspective -
without having to open each well. These editors make it easy to check and edit data.

2.8.1 Well Header

Simple search, sorting, and well filter options make a large database manageable. In the Well
Header Editor, simply click on a cell to edit, or right click to do a search and replace.
· In the Home ribbon, select Global-Data Well Header....

2.8.2 Tops

Simple search, sorting, and well filter options make a large tops database manageable. In the

42
Well Header Editor, simply click on a cell to edit any top or base of sand.
· In the Home ribbon, select Global-Data Tops....
· Select an Interpreter. Then click OK.

(NOTE: A user can edit only his own tops or imported tops - unless the Global Tops Admin
preference is set to OFF. To access this preference, go to File Preferences. In the Default
Settings window, select Project.)

2.8.3 File Paths

· In the Home ribbon, select Global-Data File Paths....

43
2.9 Preferences - Default Settings
Default Settings Options

44
2.9.1 Application Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences.
· In the Default Settings dialog, select 'Application'.

45
· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Application Properties options. Then click the Select button. This
allows the user to set the properties of each of the options listed below. For a given item,
if the setting is simply “ON”/“OFF”, then just click on the item to toggle settings.
o Tops Database - Opens the Global Tops Management dialog, as shown below.
Selecting the Set Global Tops Management Active checkbox displays the
current active database. If a user attempts to delete the active database, a
message is displayed to confirm deletion.

o Image Caching - Image loading is greatly sped up with Neuralog's image cacher.
With this option installed, images (.tif and .rwl) are cached after the first time they
are opened in NeuraSection and re-loaded from cache each time following to save
on load time. To set image caching, see Image Caching.

46
 o Scan Options - Select whether or not to open an image after scanning it.
o Auto Save Settings - Activate Auto-Saving and set Auto Save time increment in
minutes.
o Auto Log Arrange (ON/OFF)
o Open Documents at 100% (ON/OFF)
o Auto Top Marker to Correlate (ON/OFF)
o Backup On Exit (ON/OFF)
o Interpreter Alias - Allows users to assign an interpreter alias for cases when the
user wants to work on other users' tops, perhaps tops that are created from
another application.
o Save XSec JPEG (ON/OFF) - Turns on/off options to save cross-section as JPEG.
o Auto Update Curve Stats (ON/OFF)

2.9.2 Project Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences. The 'Default Settings' dialog opens as shown below.

· Select 'Project'.

· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Project Properties options. Then click Select. This allows the user to
set the properties of each of the options listed below. For a given item, if the setting is
simply “ON”/“OFF”, then just click on the item to toggle settings.

47
 o Well UWI/API Length - allows a user to set the well UWI/API length as well as set
UWI formatting. All well logs should be closed to allow UWI/API length to be set.
o Log Types - allows a user to set the log types of each logs in a project.
o Well Datum - allows a user to set the Geodetic Lat/Lon Datum or projection.
o Create User Top Set From Active - allows to set to copy all active tops to a set that
is owned by the user.
o Global Tops Admin (ON/OFF) - allows a user to turn on/off the Global Tops
management.
o Allow User Top Deletion (ON/OFF) - allows a user to turn on/off the deletion of
tops by a user.
o Strat Admin (ON/OFF) - allows a user to turn on/off the Strat panel management.
o Well Header Delete in Desktop (ON/OFF) - allows a user to turn on/off the
deletion of a well header(s) option using the Desktop application.
o Log Header Delete in Desktop (ON/OFF) - allows a user to turn on/off the deletion
of a log header(s) option using the Desktop application.
o Manage Sources

2.9.3 Well Information Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences. The Default Settings dialog opens as shown below.

· Select “Well Information”.

· Select a Setting
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)

48
 o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Well Information options. Then click Select. This allows the user to
set the properties of each of the options listed below. For a given item, if the setting is
simply “ON”/“OFF”, then just click on the item to toggle settings.
o Top
o Fault
o Perforation
o DST
o IP
o Core
o Show
o Sand Count
o Annotation

2.9.4 Single Log Display Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences. The 'Default Settings' dialog opens as shown below...

· Select 'Single Log Display'.

· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

49
 · Select one of the Single Log Display options. Then click Select. This allows the user
to set the properties of each of the options listed below. For a given item, if the setting is
simply “ON”/“OFF”, then just click on the item to toggle settings.
o Production Data Display
o Depth Marker

2.9.5 Single Log Display Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences. The 'Default Settings' dialog opens as shown below...

· Select 'Drawing Objects'. Select one of the Single Log Display options as shown
below...then click Select. This allows the user to set the properties of each of the
options listed below.

· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Drawing Objects options. Then click Select. This allows the user to
set the properties of each of the options listed below.
o Unconformity
o Freeform

50
2.9.6 Cross Section Default Settings

· Go to File Preferences. The 'Default Settings' dialog opens as shown below...

· Select 'Cross Section'.

· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Cross Section options. Then click Select. This allows the user to set
the properties of each of the options listed below. For a given item, if the setting is
simply “ON”/“OFF”, then just click on the item to toggle settings.
o Display Options / Border
o Well Header
o Title Block
o Depth Scale
o Fault Profile
o Top Profile
o Monthly Production
o Show Custom Template Startup (ON/OFF)
o LAS Depths TVD in XSec (ON/OFF)

2.9.7 Mapping Default Settings

51
· Go to File Preferences. The 'Default Settings' dialog opens as shown below...
· Select 'Mapping'.

· Select a Setting:
o Global - Option to save settings on a global level and update settings for all users in
the company. (In other words, all users who are using this database will have those
global settings changed.)
o Project - Option to apply future updates only to the active project.

· Select one of the Mapping options. Then click Select. This allows the user to set the
properties of each of the options listed below.
o Contour Elevation Font & Attributes
o Freeform

52
3 Neuralog Desktop - ArcMap Interface Preview
Neuralog Desktop is an add-on available for NeuraSection. It includes the ArcMap interface.
This interface gives you a single view to better organize, display, and access all your project
data.
NL Desktop allows geoscientists to create, evaluate, and display logs, maps, and cross
sections together within a single application. Users can perform a variety of functions.
One such function is log digitizing (with NeuraLog). Another example is to quickly perform a
complete geological evaluation in NeuraSection (with the on-screen interactive display).

Interface Overview

If you don't have Neuralog Desktop, please visit our website www.neuralog.com and
contact our Sales Representatives (by region). Or email our Sales Headquarters at
[email protected] for further information.

3.1 Desktop as Add-In Tool in ArcMap Application

Neuralog Desktop is a unique product in that it enables users to visualize, present, evaluate,

53
and manage their geological data from one application. For users with existing Esri ArcMap
installs, Neuralog Desktop unleashes the full potential behind the map.
For users who already have the ArcGIS ArcMap application, they can simply add Neuralog
Desktop as add-in tool, and connect to it. This way, they can simply use one application to do
their tasks more efficiently. (NOTE: The NeuraLog ArcExplorer Esri AddIn file must be
installed along with the Neuralog Desktop in order to add the Neuralog Desktop into
ArcMap).

To connect to Neuralog Desktop using ArcGIS ArcMap

· Using the add-in Neuralog Desktop tool in ArcMap, go to Project Connect to

Neuralog...
· Select or create a new project. (See Switching Projects between SQL and Access.)
· Once connected to Neuralog Desktop, the selected project's data are loaded and
displayed. The Tree Views, Well Grid, Logs/Documents Grid, Well Information
Grid, and NeuraSection Tools are enabled - ready to use as with NL Desktop.

3.2 Neuralog Desktop's Main Features

54
The following subsections cover these main features of Neuralog Desktop:
· Tree Views
· Desktop Grids
· Well Grid
· Column Grouping
· Logs/Documents Grid
· Well Information Grid
· ArcMap Tools
· NeuraSection Tools

3.2.1 The Tree Views

The Tree Views console consists of the following tabs:

· Search - Search wells by UWI(s); search wells by name/number; search logs by
UWI(s); do advanced well search. (See Select Wells using Search/Queries.)
· Area Tree - Displays the well locations, such as the countries and regions. The wells’
names and associated UWI(s) are displayed. The well icon indicates whether a well has
a log associated with it or not. (See Select Wells using Area Trees.)
· Workspace - Users can use the workspace to save a specific area to work on without
having to re-create them numerous times. It is an efficient tool for the user to save time
and organize the project. The workspace can be created or added within the workspace
panel or by using the Area Tree panel. (See Create and Use Workspaces.)
· Map Layers - Displays the imported map layers of the project. Users can remove a map
layer or change or edit its symbol. (See Update Map Layers Display.)

55
3.2.2 The Desktop Grids

The ArcMap Interface has 3 panels or grids where Well/Logs/Well Information are displayed
as follows:
· The Well Grid
· The Logs/Documents Grid
· The Well Information Grid

56
3.2.3 The Well Grid

The Well Grid displays information typically found in the Well Header Tab of NeuraSection's
Well Log Properties dialog. The Well Header Tab holds well and location information. These
data are used to display well information in Project Map, Areas of Interest, and Cross Sections.
Within Neuralog Desktop, graphical Well Directional Surveys can be accessed using the
right click option in the Well Grid.
· Each field in the Well Grid is sortable in ascending or descending order and/or can be
filtered by the available values in its dropdown lists.

57
Well Grid toolbar options

· Export Grid - Exports all data in the grid in .txt or .xls file. (NOTE: The default name
is Grid_Data_m-d-yyyy, i.e., Grid_Data_6-8-2013.txt.)

· Copy ALL UWIs In Grid To Clipboard - Used to copy all UWIs in the Well Grid and
paste into any document.

· Export Well/Log Data - Exports the selected well/log data from the grid (if, in the
Export Wizard, you leave “Well(s) from Project Map Selection” selected). This is similar to
NeuraSection's export. (Also see Import/Export Wells Data and Interpretations.)

· Clear Selection - Deselects the selected well/log data from the grid.

· Map Charts - For selected wells, shows Production Charts on map.

· 3D Surveys - Presents 3-D displays of selected wells.

· Export Doc Table - __.

Right click commands for each field in the Well Grid

· Select All - Selects all data in the list and displays the associated log(s) in the
Logs/Documents Grid.
· Copy Selected Rows to Clipboard (Ctrl + C) - Copy selected rows and paste into any
document.
· Zoom To - In the map, highlights and zooms to the wells selected in the Well Grid.
· Pan To - In the map, highlights and pans to the wells selected in the Well Grid.
· Log Coverage… - Opens NeuraSection's Log Coverage panel, which displays the Log
Intervals of the wells selected. (Also see Working with Well Logs >> Log Coverage.)

58
· View Log Curve Statistics… - Displays the Log Curve Statistics of LAS files
associated with the selected wells (see example below).
· Open Selected… - Opens the selected log document in NeuraSection.
· Well Directional Surveys… - Opens the directional survey of each selected well (if
available). Displays the well information, the surveys and survey data, and the map
views (Map View, West-East View, and South-North View).
o If the export data have no bottom-hole coordinates but have deviation surveys, users
can update the bottom-hole coordinates from the survey. Just click the Update BH...
button and select Yes (see example below).
· Add Log(s)… - Add log(s) to a selected well. (Must have only one well selected, or
option will not be available.)
· Scan Log… - Scan new log into the selected well (available only if NeuraScanner is
installed; again, must have only one well selected).
· Add Document(s)… - Add document(s) to a selected well. (Must have only one well
selected, or option will not be available.)
· Scan Document… - Scan new log into the selected well (available only if NeuraScanner
is installed; again, must have only one well selected).
· Delete Well(s) - Deletes the selected well. This option can be turned on/off using the
NeuraSection Preferences settings. (NOTE: Well(s) can also be deleted using the
Global Editor. See Add/Delete Wells/Logs via Global Editor.)

59
3.2.4 Column Grouping

As mentioned in the earlier section, each field in the Well Grid is sortable in ascending or
descending order and/or can be filtered by the available values in its dropdown lists. In addition,
the columns can be moved around, and wells can be grouped by column.

To group the columns in Well Grid

· Select the desired column in the Well Grid.

· Hold and drag the selected column to the gray area of the Well Grid (where the
statement 'Drag a column header here to group by that column' is displayed).

· Release the cursor.

· The selected column is now displayed in the gray area. The rows are now grouped by
this column, as shown below.

60
 · To move the column back to the original layout, simply drag it back in between any two
headers.

3.2.5 The Logs/Documents Grid

The Logs/Documents Grid displays the wells' data, including the following: UWI, Name,
Number, Description (cross section, well report, etc.), Type (i.e., LAS, TIFF, etc.), Interval (FT),
File Name, and URL (path or file directory), Source (e.g., Inhouse; i.e., where the file came
from), and (Date) Modified.

· For the well(s) selected in the Well Grid, all respective logs and documents are displayed
in the Logs/Documents Grid. (TIP: Hold Ctrl to select multiple wells.)
o To display all available logs for all wells, select the Show All checkbox.
· Each field in the Logs/Documents Grid is sortable in ascending or descending order.
In addition, logs can be filtered by the available values in each column’s dropdown list.

61
NOTE: If Show All is selected, then when you select wells in the Well Grid, the respective
files are highlighted in green in the Logs/Documents Grid.

Right click commands in the Logs/Documents Grid

· Select All - Highlights all logs and/or documents displayed in the Logs Grid
(depending on whether the display is set to "All", "Logs", or "Documents").
· Copy All To Clipboard (Ctrl + C) - Copy the selected rows and paste into any
document.
· Open Selected… - Opens selected log (LAS or image file) in NeuraSection.
· Digitize/Calibrate Selected… - Image files only. Opens selected log in NeuraLog.
· Edit Selected… - Opens selected image file with NeuraView or selected LAS file with
NeuraLog. (This option appears only when one item is selected.)
· Set Map Layer Link…
· View Selected… - Opens the selected log in NeuraSection and allows editing.

62
 · Open With… - Opens the selected LAS or image file in a selected program (e.g.,
NeuraView, NeuraLog, NeuraSection, NeuraMap, PhotoViewer, or Paint) (through the
respective dialog in Windows Explorer).
· Send to Directory… - Copy selected files to a desired directory.
· Print Log(s) - Opens NeuraView to print selected logs.
· Edit Log Type... - Available when selected rows are LAS or image files. This allows
the user to edit the log type (the “Description”; e.g., Resistivity) of the selected log.
· Delete Log(s) - Deletes the selected LAS or image file associated with the selected
well. This option can be turned on/off through the NeuraSection Preferences settings.
(NOTE: Images/LAS file(s) can also be deleted with the Global Editor. See Add/Delete
Wells/Logs via Global Editor.)
· Edit Doc Type… - Available when selected rows are for well documents. Allows user
to edit the doc type of the selected log.
· Delete Document(s) - Deletes the selected documents associated with the selected
well. This option can be turned on/off through the NeuraSection Preferences settings.
· Edit Source… - Change the source name.
· Change Well Log to Well Doc… - Change file classified as well log to a file classified
as well document.
· Change Well Doc to Well Log… - Change file classified as well document to a file
classified as well log.
· Merge LAS Files - Allows merging of two or more LAS files. Enabled when at least
two LAS files are selected.
· View Log Curve Statistics… - For viewing the Log Curve Statistics of the selected
LAS file.
· Assign To Well… - Assign a file to a well.

Toolbar options in the Logs/Documents Grid

· Export Grid - Exports what’s displayed in the Logs/Documents Grid; saves the
table to an XLS or TXT file.

· Clear Selection - Clears the selected well/log data from the grid.

· Export Doc Table

Well Log Curve Statistics sample via Logs/Documents Grid

(For LAS files only.)

63
 Example of Well Log Curve Statistics

3.2.6 The Well Information Grid

From the wells listed in the Well Grid, the Well Information Grid displays each well’s Well
Header, Additional Info, Directional Survey, Markers, Sand count, Monthly Production, and
Production Tests data. These data can also be found in the Well Log Properties in
NeuraSection. (See NeuraSection's Well Header Tab, Deviation Tab, Markers Tab, Sand
Display Tab, Monthly Production Tab, Production Data Tab).
· Each tab in the Well Information Grid is for view only and cannot be edited. The tabs
are as follows:
o Header
o Additional Info
o Dir. Survey
o Markers
o Sand Count
o Monthly Production
o Production Tests
o Custom Tables (if applicable)

64
 · The Well Counter displays the row number - with respect to UWI order - where the
selected well appears in the Well Grid. In other words, the Well Counter is always with
respect to UWI order - even when re-ordering the Well Grid by a different column.
For example, if the 3rd row is highlighted or selected in the Well Grid, its information is
displayed in the Well Information Grid as #3 of the total number of wells in the Well
Grid.

3.2.7 ArcMap Tools

65
ArcMap Tool Functions

· Save as - Saves current map document to a new file.

· Refresh View - Refreshes the active view.
· Zoom In - Zooms in by clicking a point or dragging a box.

· Zoom Out - Zooms out by clicking a point or dragging a box. (To zoom far out, use
a small box.)

· Pan - Pans the map.

· Full Extent - Zooms to the full extent of the map.

· Fixed Zoom In - Zooms in on the center of the user’s map.

· Fixed Zoom Out - Zooms out on the center of the user’s map.
· Go Back to Previous Extent - Goes back to the extent (zoom/pan) that the user
previously viewed. Eventually goes back the initial extent that the user viewed.

· Go to Next Extent - Goes forward again through the sequence of extents the user
is viewing. Eventually goes to the most recent extent the user viewed.
· Select Features - Selects features by clicking or dragging a box.

66
 · Clear Selection - Deselects features.

· Zoom to Selected Features - Zooms to selected features.

· Pan to Selected - Pans to selected features.

· Identify - Identifies geographic features by clicking on them or dragging a box

around them.

· Find - Finds a geographic feature, place, or address.

· Measure - Measures a distance and area on the map.

· Export Map - Exports map.

· Add Data - Adds data into map from various sources. Go to ArcGIS Resources
online for help with ArcMap Transformations for external .MXD files coming into NL
Desktop.

· Add CAD Data - Adds data from CAD files (.dxf, .dwg, or .dgn).

· Map Charts - For selected wells, shows Production Charts on map.

3.2.8 NeuraSection Tools

Working with NeuraSection Projects

Users are able to choose the active NeuraSection project in ArcMap. Additionally, they have
the opportunity to create a new NeuraSection project from the ArcMap Interface. From there,
they can set it as the active NeuraSection project.

Working with Cross Sections

Users are able to create cross sections in NeuraSection using ArcMap Interface. Additionally,
they will be able to retrieve all cross sections from NeuraSection. They can render these
sections as lines connecting wells in ArcMap (henceforth referred to as Cross Section lines).
Additionally, users have the option of exporting the Cross Section line to their database of
choice. Other functions include such features as the following: the ability to preview the cross
section referenced by the Cross Section line - and the ability to display the corresponding
cross section in NeuraSection.

67
NeuraSection Tool Functions

· Select or Add/Change a NeuraSection Project - Allows users

to select a NeuraSection project to be the active project. Can also add/ change a new
project and set it as the active project.

· Select Wells - Selects wells to send over to NeuraSection - or for creating a new
cross section. (NOTE: To select multiple wells, shift-click on the wells. This method
selects multiple wells and displays them in no particular order. Without holding shift, the
cross section displays the wells in the order they were selected.)

· Create Cross Section - Generates a cross section in NeuraSection with the

selected wells. Uses the order that the user selected the wells. If other well and log data
are configured in the configuration utility, all pertinent data will be retrieved and
transferred to NeuraSection.

· Correlate Logs - Used to correlate logs.

68
 · Open Well Logs - Used to open existing well documents or logs (also see Open
Existing Wells).

· Create AOI - Used to create a new Area of interest (AOI). (See Area of Interest
(AOI) - Gridless Mapping.)

· Open AOI - Used to open a new Area of interest (AOI). (See Area of Interest
(AOI) - Gridless Mapping.)

· Open Cross Section - Opens the selected cross section line in NeuraSection. In
NeuraSection, users can modify the cross section. All changes to the section will be
automatically reflected in the ArcGIS cross section line feature class.

· Preview Cross Section - Users can click on an existing cross section line in
ArcMap and get a preview image (using Photos in Windows).

· Open Seismic Line

· Open Map Layer Link

· Clear Well Selection - Clears the selected wells.

· Filter Wells - Opens the Well Query/Filter dialog - except nothing will be
entered into the Well Grid. Instead, on the map, this tool highlights wells filtered for
certain data types (images, LAS files, tops, etc.).

· Open Selected Project in NX - Opens the selected project in NeuraSection,

taking the user to the NeuraSection Wizard.

3.3 Filter Wells Query Options

69
Within Neuralog Desktop, filtering wells can be done with the following options:
· To display the search results in the Well Grid:
o Query > Well Query…
o Tree Views window à Search à Advanced Well Search
· For highlighting certain wells in the map:
o ArcMap window à Filter Wells button

Wells can be filtered with the following criteria:

· Log Images
· LAS files
· No Logs
· Tops / No Tops
· Deviation Survey / No Deviation Survey
· Production Data
· Sand Count(s)
· Monthly Production
· Faults
· Advanced Filter Options
· Custom Tables [appears only if the project contains Custom Tables]

Advanced Filter Options filter wells by the following tables/fields:

· Header
o Status

70
 o Total Depth
o Surface Latitude / Longitude
o Bottom Latitude / Longitude
o UWI / Name
o Operator / Operator 2
o Number
o Country
o Lease/Region
o State
o County/Area
o Field
o Rig / Spud / On Prod Date
o Producing Form
o Section / Township / Range
o Permit No. / Prospect
o W/H Created / Modified
· Logs/Docs
o Calibrated
o Log Type
o Log Source
o Curve Mnem
o Log Modified
o Well Doc Type
o Well Doc Source
o Well Doc Modified
· Tops
o Tops Interpreter
o Surface
o Top Depth
o Top Base Depth
o Modified Date
· Cumulative Production
o Cumul Surface
o Cumul Prod Date
o Cumul Since
o Cumul Oil Volume / Rate
o Cumul Gas Volume / Rate
o Cumul Water Volume / Rate
o Cumul Flow Tube Pressure

71
 o Cumul Bottom Hole Pressure
o Cumul Comments
o Cumul First / Last Date
· Monthly Production
o Monthly Producing Form
o Monthly Prod. Surface
o Activity Type
o Mo. Prod. Oil / Gas / Water Volume
o CO2
o Injection
o Nitrogen
o NGL
o Sulphur
o Month / Year of Prod.
o Production Date
o Allocation Factor
o Total Prod. Days
o Total Operating Hours
o Mo. Prod. Comments
· Faults
o Fault
o Fault Depth
· Perfs
o Perf Surface / Top / Base
o Number of Shots
o Shot Diameter
o Squeezed
· Cores
o Core Surface
o Core Top
o Core Base
o Core Type
· Drill Stem Tests
o DST Surface / Top / Base
o Initial / Final Hydrostat Pressure
o Initial / Final Flow Pressure
o Initial / Final Shutin Pressure
o Open / Shutin Time

72
 o Top Choke
o DST BHT
o Cushion Amount / Type
· Initial Potentials
o IP Surface
o IP Top / Base
o IP Oil / Gas / Water Volume
o IP Oil / Gas / Water Rate Units
o IP Water Rate Units
o IP Flow Tube Pressure
o IP Bottom Hole Pressure
o Test Duration
o IP Choke / BHT
o IP Comments

3.4 Filter Wells Query from Top Menu

· From the top menu, select Query > Well Query....

(NOTE: This dialog can also be accessed through the Search Tab of the Tree Views window -
under Advanced Well Search.)

73
3.5 Graphical Well Directional Survey
Within Neuralog Desktop, graphical Well Directional Surveys can be accessed using the
right click option in the Well Grid. The survey displays the well information, the surveys and
survey data, and the graphical interpretation of the map views (overall view, West-East view,
and South-North view).

To access/update a well directional survey

· Right click on the well in the Well Grid. Select Well Directional Surveys.... (This
option appears only for wells containing such a survey.)

· When selected, it opens the directional survey of a well.

74
 Example of a Well Directional Survey

· When there are instances where the export data have no bottom hole but have deviation
surveys, users can update well bottom hole lat/lon from the survey.
o Click the Update BH... button and select Yes. (See example above.)

3.6 NeuraSection Workflows within Neuralog Desktop

The following sub-subsections explain the high-level NeuraSection workflows within Neuralog
Desktop:
· Switching Projects between SQL and Access
· Save and Change Projects
· Import/Export Well Data and Interpretations
· Globally Update Well Headers, File Paths, and Bottom Hole Locations
· Add/Delete Wells/Logs via Global Editor
· Select Wells via Map, Queries, and Area Trees
· Select Wells/Logs for Quick Correlation and Review
· Create, Open, and Preview Cross Sections
· Create and Open Areas of Interest (AOIs)
· Add/View Log(s) and Document(s) to Wells
· Create and Use Workspaces
· Update Layout/Displays (such as Area Tree and Map Layers)

75
 · Set Preferences (such as Tops Interpreters and Doc Types)
· Manage Strat Panel
· Filter Wells Query using NeuraSection Tool

3.6.1 Switching Projects between SQL and Access

In Neuralog Desktop, users can select whether to use SQL server or Access database.

Project Setup Panel

Connecting to a Database
To connect to SQL Database
· In the Project Setup dialog (Select Global Project) under “Group”, select the SQL
Server radio button.
· Under “Current Project Group”, select the path of the project (e.g., C:\nds\SQL
Projects).
· Under “Current Server”, select the path or data source of the SQL server.

To connect to Access Database

· In the Project Setup dialog (Select Global Project), under “Group”, select the
Access radio button.
· Under “Current Project Group”, select the path of the project (e.g., C:\nds\SQL

76
 Projects).
Note: The “Current Server” applies only to SQL. It is not displayed as an option for
Access.
· Once the SQL server is selected, all the existing projects in that database are displayed
under “Projects in Selected Group” in the Project Setup dialog.
o “Find Projects” - Enter the name of the project to find. For each entered letter of the
project, the project is automatically being selected in “Projects in Selected Group”.
This makes it easier to select projects. (NOTE: Must start with the first character of
the target project name, such as “1” for “1Chambers”.)
o “Selected Project” - A static display of the name of the selected project.
o “Create New Project...” - Users can create new projects by clicking this button.
Once the new project is created, it is added to the list under “Projects in Selected
Group”. It is now ready for selection.
· Click OK. The Neuralog Desktop main application window opens up.

Switching projects and databases within the main application window

· Go to main menu. Select File Project Change Project….
· Click Yes in the “Neuralog Connect” dialog, as shown below.

· The Project Setup dialog (Select Global Project) displays the selected group or
database and its associated projects.
o If you want to select another project from the same database, simply select it from
“Projects in Selected Group” and click OK.
o If you want to select another project from another database, simply connect to the
other database (see instructions above for the desired database). Select the new
project from “Projects in Selected Group”, and click OK.

3.6.2 Save and Change Projects

Like NeuraSection, users can switch between projects (SQL and/or Access) seamlessly. They
can save all the associated documents to the database of choice (Access to Access, Access to
SQL, SQL to Access, or SQL to SQL).

To save a new project to another database

77
 · Go to the main menu, select File Project Save Project As....
· Select the database (Access or SQL) you want to use. (NOTE: For SQL, selecting a
server data source is required. Users can add/remove external data source. Setting a
new Default File Directory will change for all projects on the server.)

· Check Include All Files, if desired. This will copy all files that are part of the project.
Otherwise, the new project just links to the original files.
· Under Group Project Directory, select the path or directory where you want to save
your project.
· Enter the name of the new project.
· Click Save.

To save a new project to another database

· Go to the main menu. Select File Project Change Project....

· Click Yes to the dialog below:

· The Project Setup Panel will display, where you will have an option to create a new
78
 project or open an existing project.

3.6.3 Import/Export Well Data and Interpretations

Within Neuralog Desktop, users can import and export well/log or map data similarly with
NeuraSection.

Import Well Data

· From the top menu, select Load Well/Log Data....

Export Well Data

· From the top menu, select File Export Well/Log Data... or Map Data....

3.6.3 (a) Import Well Data

79
Neuralog Desktop can import well information directly from the following industry-standard
formats:
· Generic ASCII and Excel Loader
· GCS Well and Top File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V2 File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V3 File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V4 File
· IHS Energy Well Fixed 197 File
· IHS Energy Well Fixed 297 File
· IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File
· MMS Offshore Directional Survey
· Shape File Well Spots
· Tobin WCS File
· Custom Table

80
 · GCS Log Image Files
· GeoGraphix Depth Reg. ASCII Files
· IHS Energy XML Depth Registration
· MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs
· MMS Log CD
· NeuraLog (NLGX) File
· NeuraLog (NLGX) File Directory Batch Load
· PETRA Log Image Calibration Files
· TGS (A2D) smartRASTER
· TGS (A2D) SIF Files
· LAS File Loader (Batch)
· TIFF Log Loader (Batch)
· Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch)
· Well Document Loader (Batch)
· Field Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Country Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Region Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel)

To import well data

· Go to the main menu. Select Load Well/Log Data....
· Select the Import File type (select one as shown above).
· Browse for the import file by clicking the Import File browse button.
NOTE: The import processes in Neuralog Desktop and NeuraSection are similar. For more
detailed information, perform the rest of the process by using the NeuraSection instructions
(Well/Log Data Import section).
· Select the file.
· Click Next.
· If applicable, set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· If applicable, set Map System for the data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if applicable.

81
 · Click Finish.

3.6.3 (b) Export Well Data

Well data export is handled in a manner similar to well data import.

Like NeuraSection, Neuralog Desktop can export well data for an entire project, select wells
only, or wells tied to a specific cross section. This is done with the Export Wizard.
Neuralog Desktop Export File Types:
· GCS Well and Top
· GeoGraphix WellBase V2
· GeoGraphix WellBase V3
· GeoGraphix WellBase V4
· Generic ASCII
· MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
· Neuralog Database (can export to new or existing database)
· NeuraWell XML
· Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
· GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1

You can also export templates to an existing project.

Neuralog Desktop Template Types:
· Strat Panel and Log Type Table
· Custom Table

82
Export using the Main Menu
· Go to the main menu. Select File Export Well/Log Data....
· Select from the following options:

Export WELL Data

o ALL Wells in Project - Export ALL Wells in Project.
o Choose From Well List - Export SELECTED Well(s).
o Selected Cross Section(s) - Export SELECTED Cross Section(s).
o Well(s) from Project Map Selection - Export wells from Selection in
Project Map or Area of Interest.

Export TEMPLATE to Existing Project

o Strat Panel and Log Type Table - Export Stat Panel and Log Type Table
TEMPLATES.
o Custom Table - Export Custom Table TEMPLATES.

83
 · The export process is similar between Neuralog Desktop and NeuraSection. Therefore,
users can follow the NeuraSection instructions for the following topics (NOTE: Follow
the subsequent steps after selecting the Export Well Data):
o Export ALL Wells in Project
o Export Selected Well(s)
o Export Selected Cross Section(s)
o Export Strat Panel and Log Type Table

Export using the Well Grid

· Select/highlight the wells you want to export from the Well Grid. (NOTE: Only wells
with associated logs can be exported.)

· Click the Export button( ). The Export Wizard displays with “Well(s) from Project
Map Selected” pre-selected.

· Click Next.
· In the Export Wizard, “Select Logs to Export” appears with the list of selected wells.
In this dialog, users can use the following:

84
 o Select/Deselect ALL (button) - Allows selecting/deselecting wells for export.
o Filter Dialog - Displays the Filter Wells dialog. Allows the user to filter wells
according to the data types contained - and to export only the filtered wells.

· Click Next. The Export Wizard now asks you to select the Export File Type (see big
figure above). Select from the following types:
o GCS Well and Top
o GeoGraphix WellBase V2
o GeoGraphix WellBase V3
o Generic ASCII
o MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
o Neuralog Database (also see how to export to new or existing project database)
o NeuraWell XML
o Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
o GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1

NOTE: The export processes in Neuralog Desktop and NeuraSection are similar. Therefore,
users can follow the rest of the export steps with the NeuraSection instructions (by going to the
Export File Types section).

3.6.4 Globally Update Wells Headers, File Paths, and Bottom

85
Hole Locations

Well Headers, Tops, and File Paths can be edited or updated from the Global Editor. These
editors make it easy to check and edit data. In addition, users will be able to update bottom hole
locations for all wells. Or they can update wells with unset bottom hole locations (for instances
where the export data has no bottom-hole location - but has deviation surveys).

To edit Well Headers

· From the main menu, select GLOBAL EDITOR Well Headers....
· Select a desired field to update. (NOTE: All fields in the Well Header Editor are editable.)
o By right-clicking, the user can copy a cell without highlighting it. By right-clicking
again, the user can paste the entry into multiple cells selected.
o Users can also highlight a cell entry. Then they can type over, cut, copy, or delete it.

· Click Apply or OK.

To edit File Paths

· From the main menu, select GLOBAL EDITOR File Paths [Well Logs… /
Well Docs… / Country Docs… / Field Docs… / Lease/Region Docs… / Prospect
Docs… / Operator Docs…].

86
 File Paths - Well Logs

To calculate Bottom Hole Locations from Surveys

· From the main menu, select GLOBAL EDITOR Calculate Bottom Hole
Locations from Surveys....
· Select one of the following options:
o Update Bottom Hole Location for All Wells
o Update Wells with Unset Bottom Hole Locations

87
 · Click the Calculate button. (See The Well Grid to learn more about Well Directional
Surveys).

3.6.5 Add/Delete Wells/Logs via Global Editor

Through the Global Editor, users can add or delete wells or logs in Neuralog Desktop.

To add new well(s) via Global Editor

· Select Global Editor Well Headers....

· Click the Add New Well(s) button in the Well Header Editor dialog.
· If necessary, deactivate Lock for Editing (checkbox).
· In the Add New Well dialog, fill in all pertinent data. You must enter the required
fields: API/UWI or Well Name.

88
 · Click Apply. Then click OK. The new well is displayed in the Well Header Editor
dialog.

Through the Global Editor, users can delete wells/logs in Neuralog Desktop.
(NOTE: If you don't see the Add New Well(s) button, do the following steps:
· Go to ...\nds\bin. Open NLAdmin.exe. This opens the Neuralog Interpreter Admin
Tool.
· Inside this tool, select your current Interpreter name.
· Set "Edit Well Data" to ON.
· Click OK and confirm you want to save your changes.
· Re-open the Well Header Editor dialog. You may need to re-open two times to
properly refresh.)

To add logs to Well(s)

· From the Well Grid, select (highlight) a well you want to add logs to.
· Right click on the row containing the selected well. Select Add Log(s)…, as shown
below.

89
· Browse for and select the log(s) to be added to the wells.
· If a single log is selected, users will have the option to select the Log Type [aka
“Description”] in the dialog shown below.
o If multiple logs are selected, the same dialog will appear. In this case, the dialog
offers the option to set the same settings for all logs in the batch.

90
· After selecting the Log Type (aka “Description”) (or clicking Cancel to skip this
option), you will be offered the option of selecting the Source.

· Each log added to a well will be dynamically added to the Logs/Documents Grid. The
final display of the Well Grid and the Logs/Documents Grid will be similar to the one
below.
· To manually adjust log types, go to the Logs/Documents Grid. Right click on the
desired log and select Edit Log Type. From there, you can select the log type in the
Select Log Type dialog, as shown below:

91
To delete wells via Global Editor
· Open NeuraSection. (TIP: Go to Tools Open NeuraSection.)
· In NeuraSection, go to File Preferences. Select Project under Set Default
Properties. If you see “Well Header Delete in Desktop (OFF)”, then click on it. Now
it should say “… (ON)”. For Neuralog Desktop, this enables the following feature:
Global Editor Delete Well(s)…. Close NeuraSection.
· Go to Desktop’s main menu. Select Global Editor Delete Wells....

92
 · Select/find the desired well(s) to delete in the wells list, as shown below.
o Display Options - Users have the options to display all wells or filtered wells.

· Click OK. The deleted wells are removed from the Well Grid.
· (NOTE: Wells can also be deleted with the right click option in the Well Grid.)
(NOTE: The preference to delete wells is set to ON by default. To turn it OFF, do the
following:
· Open the NeuraSection application.
· Go to File Preferences. In the dialog, select Project under Set Default
Properties.
· Click 'Well Header Delete in Desktop (ON)'. The setting will turn from “ON” to
“OFF”.
· This disables the following option in NL Desktop: Global Editor Delete
Well(s).
· Close NeuraSection.)
(NOTE: If you still can't delete wells, do the following steps:
· Go to ...\nds\bin. Open NLAdmin.exe. This opens the Neuralog Interpreter Admin
Tool.
· Inside this tool, select your current Interpreter name.

93
 · Set "Delete Well Headers" to ON.
· Click OK and confirm you want to save your changes.)

To delete logs via Global Editor

· Open NeuraSection.
· In NeuraSection, go to File Preferences. Select Project under Set Default
Properties. If you see “Log Delete in Desktop (OFF)”, then click on it. Now it should
say “… (ON)”. For Neuralog Desktop, this enables the following option: Global Editor
Delete Image(s)/LAS File(s)…. Close NeuraSection.
· Go to Desktop’s main menu. Select Global Editor Delete Image(s)/LAS
File(s)....
· Select/find the desired well(s) to delete in the wells list, as shown below.
o Display Options - Users have the options to display all wells or filtered wells.

· Click OK. The selected logs are removed from the Logs/Documents Grid.
(NOTE: The preference to delete logs is set to ON by default. To turn it OFF, do the
following:
· Open the NeuraSection application.
· Go to File Preferences. In the dialog, select Project under Set Default
Properties.

94
 · Click 'Log Delete in Desktop (ON)'. The setting will turn from “ON” to “OFF”.
· This disables the following option in NL Desktop: Global Editor Delete
Image(s)/LAS File(s).
· Close NeuraSection.)

(NOTE: If you still can't delete wells, do the following steps:

· Go to ...\nds\bin. Open NLAdmin.exe. This opens the Neuralog Interpreter Admin
Tool.
· Inside this tool, select your current Interpreter name.
· Set "Delete Logs" to ON.
· Click OK and confirm you want to save your changes.)

3.6.6 Select Wells via Map, Queries and Area Trees

Within Neuralog Desktop, users can select wells via Map, Queries and Area Trees.
· Select Wells via Map
· Select Wells using Area Trees
· Select Wells using Search/Queries
o Search Wells By UWI(s)
o Search Wells By Name Number
o Search Logs By UWI(s)
o Advanced Well Search

3.6.6 (a) Select Wells via Map

To select Wells via Map

· From the ArcMap Extension Tools, select the “Select Features” icon.

· The cursor becomes . Hold and drag the cursor to draw a box around the desired
well(s) to select.

95
 · Once the selection is complete (i.e., when the cursor is let go), the selected wells are
highlighted in the map, as shown in the red circle below. In addition, only the selected
wells are displayed in the Well Grid.

To clear the selected Wells in the Map

· From the ArcMap Extension Tools, select the “Clear Selection” icon.

· The selected wells are de-selected (highlights disappear). They are removed and no
longer displayed in the Well Grid.

3.6.6 (b) Select Wells using Area Trees

The Area Tree displays the breakdown of the wells’ locations, such as the countries, states,
and/or regions. The wells' names and associated UWIs are displayed, and the well icon

96
indicates whether a well has a log associated with it or not.

The right click options in Workspace

97
 · Country level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Add Country and/or Document(s)…

· State level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Expand Tree to Well/Document Total

· County level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Expand Tree to Log/Doc Nodes

To select Wells using Area Trees

· Under Tree Views, select the Area Tree tab.

· To select all wells in a region, click on a desired set of wells. All wells under it are
displayed in the Well Grid.
OR
· To display a particular well, select the desired well.
o The information of the selected well is displayed in the Well Grid and the Well
Information Grid.
(NOTE: If a well is unassigned, no information is displayed in the Logs/Documents Grid. Only
the available data is displayed in the Well Grid and Well Information Grid.)

98
3.6.6 (c) Select Wells using Search/Queries

The Search tab in the Tree Views provides different options to search for wells:
· Search Wells By UWI(s)
· Search Wells By Name Number
· Search Logs By UWI(s)
· Advanced Well Search

99
1.1.1.1.1. 3.6.6 (c) (1) Search Wells By UWI(s)

· Select the Search tab in Tree Views.

· Click Search Wells by UWI(s).
· In the top text box, enter all or part of a UWI. Or enter an asterisk (*) to select all
UWI(s).

· Click the green plus button ( ). The results are displayed in the list box.
o To make the selection shorter (if needed) for efficiency, the user can use the red

“X” button ( ) to remove unnecessary UWIs in the list.

100
 · In the list box, make sure only the desired UWIs are included. Then click OK.
o All wells with the selected UWIs (i.e., what appears in the list) are displayed in the
Well Grid. The wells are highlighted in the map.

· To clear the well selection, click the ‘Clear Selection’ icon in the ArcMap
Extension Tools.

1.1.1.1.2. 3.6.6 (c) (2) Search Wells by Name Number

· Select the 'Search' tab in Tree Views.

· Click 'Search Wells by Name Number'.

101
 · Enter the Well Name (keyin '%' for wildcard).
OR
· Enter the Well Number. Or leave the well number # text box blank.
· Click OK.
o All wells with the selected name or number are displayed in the Well Grid and the
wells are highlighted in the map.

1.1.1.1.3. 3.6.6 (c) (3) Search Logs by UWI(s)

· Select the 'Search' tab in Tree Views.

· Click 'Search Logs by UWI(s)'.
· On the top textbox, enter all or part of a UWI. Or enter the asterisk (*) sign to
select all UWIs.

· Click the green plus button ( ). The results of the query are displayed in the list
box.
o To make the selection shorter (if needed) for efficiency, user can use the red X

button ( ) to remove some of the unnecessary UWI(s) in the list.

102
o Select the desired UWI from the list box. Then click OK.
§ All wells with the selected UWI(s) are displayed in the Well Grid and the wells are
highlighted in the map.
§ All logs for the wells of the selected UWI(s) are displayed in the Logs Grid.

103
 · To clear the well selection, click the Clear Selection button ( ) in the ArcMap
Extension Tools.

1.1.1.1.4. 3.6.6 (c) (4) Advanced Well Search

· Select the Search tab in Tree Views.

· Click “Advanced Well Search”.
o Select at least one data type (e.g., images, LAS files, tops, and so on).
OR
o Use the advanced filter options to select different fields and values (in the dropdown
lists).

104
 · Click Apply, and then click OK.
· The filtered wells are displayed in the Well Grid. The wells are highlighted in the map.

3.6.7 Select Wells/Logs for Quick Correlation and Review

To select Wells/Logs for Quick Correlation and Review

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Select Wells” button
( ).

105
· The cursor takes the following form: . The “Cross Section Wells” panel
displays.
· Click each well you want to correlate. As you click each well, a line is automatically
drawn to connect each of them. In addition, the “Cross Section Wells” panel
dynamically displays the following (available) information for each selected well:
o UWI
o Well Name
o Well Operator
o Well Number
o Log Count

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Correlate Logs”

button ( ).
o If a selected well has multiple logs available, the logs are displayed under
“Available Logs” in the Select Log(s) dialog in NeuraSection:

106
To correlate all available logs:
o Click the Move ALL to Selected button ( ). This action moves all logs under
“Available Logs” to “Selected Logs”.
§ To move all the logs under “Selected Logs” back to “Available Logs”, click
the Move ALL to Available button ( ).

To correlate selected logs:

o Select the log(s) to correlate from “Available Logs”. (NOTE: Hold down Ctrl for
multiple selections.)

o Click the green arrow ( ). The selected logs are moved to “Selected Logs”.

§ Click the red arrow ( ). The selected logs are returned to “Available
Logs”.
o Click the Next Well button. Select the applicable logs (if needed).
§ If needed, click the Back button to change the log selection for the previous well.
o Click Finish.
o All selected logs for each well are opened/displayed in NeuraSection. They appear
in Correlation Mode and are ready for review. To continue with correlation, go to
the material on Log Correlation.

107
3.6.8 Create, Open, and Preview Cross Sections

Cross sections can be created, opened, and previewed via Neuralog Desktop using the
NeuraSection Tools:

Create a Cross Section

Open a Cross Section

Preview a Cross Section

To create a Cross Section

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Select Wells” button
( ).
· Select your desired wells.
· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Create Cross

108
 Section” button ( ).
· The new cross section will be opened in NeuraSection.
· The following dialogs will show up. For each one, click OK to go to the next.

(If Ask on Startup is selected.)

(If any wells have more than one log.)

Section Properties Dialog

109
 · In the Section Properties dialog, enter the values you want, and click OK. From
there, further adjust the cross section as you please, and save your work.

To open a Cross Section

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Open Cross

Section” button ( ).
· Click on your target cross section. If more than one cross section is on the same line,
you will be asked to choose which one to open.
· The cross section will be opened in NeuraSection.

110
To preview a Cross Section

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Preview Cross

Section” button ( ).
· Click on your target cross section. If more than one cross section is on the same line,
you will be asked to choose which one to preview.
· A preview of the cross section will be opened in Photos.

111
3.6.9 Create and Open Areas of Interest (AOIs)

Just like cross sections, AOIs can be created and opened via Neuralog Desktop, as shown
below.

To create an Area of Interest (AOI)

· From ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Create AOI” button (

).

· The cursor takes the following form: . Hold and drag the cursor to draw a box, to
outline the desired area of interest.

112
 · Release the cursor. (The box turns red once the cursor is released.) The new AOI is
opened in the NeuraSection application. From there, you can work on and save the
AOI.

To open an Area of Interest (AOI)

· From the ArcMap Extension/NeuraSection Tools, select the “Open AOI” button (
).

o The cursor takes the following form: . Hold and drag the cursor to draw a box
over any part of an AOI.
o If the box is drawn to a single AOI, the NeuraSection application opens the AOI. If a
filter was previously applied, the Filter Wells dialog opens up. Select the data
types. Then click Apply and OK.

113
 · If the box encompasses multiple AOIs, the Map Choice dialog appears with the list of
the AOIs.
o Select the AOI you want to open. Then click OK.

o If a filter was previously applied, the Filter Wells dialog opens up. Select the data
types. Then click Apply and OK.
o The AOI selected is opened in NeuraSection. For more information on how to work
with AOIs, go to Area of Interest (AOI) - Gridless Mapping.

3.6.10 Add/View Log(s) and Document(s) to a Well

With a simple right click on a well in the Well Grid, adding log(s) and document(s) to a well
114
is simple and easy in Neuralog Desktop in both SQL and Access databases. In addition, a
well log type and document type can easily be selected using this process.

To add Logs to Well(s)

· From the Well Grid, select or highlight a well you want to add logs to.
· Right click on any columns of the selected well. Select Add Log(s)…, as shown
below.
· Browse for and select the log(s) to be added to the wells.
· If a single log is selected, users will have the option to select the Log Type [aka
“Description”] in the dialog shown below.
o If multiple logs are selected, the same dialog will appear. In this case, the dialog
offers the option to set the same settings for all logs in the batch.

115
 · After selecting the Log Type (aka “Description”) (or clicking Cancel to skip this option),
you will be offered the option of selecting the Source.

· Each log added to a well will be dynamically added to the Logs/Documents Grid. The
final display of the Well Grid and the Logs/Documents Grid will be similar to the one
below.

To Edit a Log Type of a well

· To manually adjust log types, go to the Logs/Documents Grid.

· Right click on the desired log and select Edit Log Type.
· From there, you can select the log type in the Select Log Type dialog, as shown
below:

116
To add well document(s) to Well(s)

· Select or highlight a well you want to add well documents from the Well Grid.
· Right click on any columns of the selected well. Select Add Document(s), as shown
below:

117
 · Browse for and select the well document to be added to the wells.
· Select the Document Type. If multiple well documents are selected, they will all be
imported as the same Document Type.
o To avoid setting the Document Type upfront, you can select “Not Set” (default).
From there, you can edit this property through the following process below.

To Edit a Doc Type of a well document

· Go to the Logs/Documents Grid, right click on the desired well document...

· Select Edit Doc Type.... The Select Doc Type dialog displays, as shown below.
Select the Doc Type desired, then click OK.

118
(NOTE: To add or delete doc type, go to top menu, PREFERENCES... Manage
Document Types.)

3.6.11 Create and Use Workspaces

Users can conveniently organize the areas they are working on by using the Workspace. In
the Workspace, users can create a space for (a) specific country(ies) or region(s), instead of
sorting through a long list in the Area Tree every time.

The right click options in Workspace

119
 · Country level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Add Country and/or Document(s)…

· State level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Expand Tree to Well/Document Total

· County level
o Add Area to Workspace…
o Zoom To
o Well Query…
o Well Query Details-to-Map…
o Expand Tree to Log/Doc Nodes

To add area to the Workspace

· Go to the Area Tree tab in the Tree Views.
· Right click on a country, state (if applicable), or county (if applicable).
NOTE:
o If a country is selected, all the levels (i.e. states, counties, and its wells) below or
under it are copied to the workspace.
o If a state is selected, all the counties and its wells below or under it are copied to the
workspace.
o If a county is selected, all the wells below or under it are copied to the workspace.
· Select Add Area to Workspace….
· Click the Create New button.

120
· Enter the Workspace Name in the Create New Workspace dialog. Then click OK.
o The new workspace is added to the Choose Workspace dialog.
· Select the workspace (if not already selected). Then click OK.
o The selected area is added to the workspace.
· To view the created workspace, go to the Workspace tab in the Tree Views.

121
To delete an item from a workspace
· Go to the Workspace tab in the Tree Views.
· Right click on the item in the workspace you want to delete.

· Click “Delete Item”.

o The selected item is deleted from the Workspace.

To delete a workspace
· Go to the Workspace tab in the Tree Views.
· Right click on the highest level (main folder) of a workspace.

· Select Delete Workspace.

122
 o The selected workspace is deleted from the Workspace.

To zoom to a workspace or an item

· Go to the Workspace tab in the Tree Views.
· Right click on a workspace or an item.
· Click Zoom To....

3.6.12 Update Layout/Displays

Oftentimes, you may have updates to wells (e.g., location), cross sections, or areas of interest.
It becomes necessary to update the displays of the Area Tree, Well Spot Layers, Cross
Section/AOI (area of interest) Layers. Users have the following tools for updating the displays:
· Update Area Tree Display
· Update Well Spots Display
· Update Cross Section/AOI Displays
· Update Map Layers Display

3.6.12 (a) Update Area Tree Display

As mentioned in the earlier section, Area Tree displays the breakdown of the well locations,
such as the countries, states, or regions. Occasionally, the imported data may have to be
corrected. For these cases, it is possible to update the well locations. By correcting them, the
Area Tree may have to be updated to display the correct data.

To update the Area Tree

· From the Main Menu, select Global Editor Well Headers....
· To change the country of a well, go to the “Country” column in the Well Header
Editor, as shown below. (NOTE: If the country is not US, the “State” and “County”
columns refresh with blank values. If the country is US, you must select the State and
County - or else they will be extracted from the UWI. If the county is not selected, the
region is not going to be displayed in the Area Tree.)

123
· Once you have selected or corrected the data, click Apply.
· For the confirmation dialog shown below, click Yes.

· Click OK. The Well Header Editor is put away.

· If necessary, go to the main menu and select Tools Update Area Tree. The
updated data are displayed in the Area Tree, as shown below.

124
3.6.12 (b) Update Well Spots Display

In Neuralog Desktop, users can update well layers if locations are changed - or if new wells
are added from NeuraSection.

To update Well Spots display

· Go to the main menu. Select Tools Rebuild Well Layers.
· A dialog like below appears. It gets put away after ArcMap is updated.

3.6.12 (c) Update Cross Section/AOI Displays

If there have been updates made to cross sections and AOIs (areas of interest), users can also
update the layer displays.

To update Cross Section/AOI (Area of Interest) display

125
 · Go to the main menu. Select Tools Update Cross Section/AOI Layers.
· The cross section and/or AOI display is updated in ArcMap.

3.6.12 (d) Update Map Layers Display

Map Layers
Map Layers displays the imported map layers of a project (e.g., base map, shapes, well spots,
AOIs, and cross sections). Users can remove or hide a map layer. They can also change or
edit its symbol.

To add map layers into Desktop

· Using the ArcMap Tools, click the Add Data tool ( ). This tool can be used to add
data into the map from various sources. Go to ArcGIS Resources online for help with
ArcMap Transformations for external .MXD files coming into NL Desktop.

The right click options in Map Layers

· Remove layer - Removes the selected layer.
· Edit Symbol… - Users can change the symbol of a selected layer, as well as color and
size. A preview is displayed of the updates.
· Label Features… - Users can turn on/off the display of label features in the map.

126
 These features vary with respect to each kind of layer. Label Features now has Font
Size and Placement properties.
· Selectable / Not Selectable - If the layer is currently selectable, it says “Selectable”. If
not, it says “Not Selectable”. Selecting this item toggles between the two settings.
· Zoom To Layer - Zooms to respective layer.

3.6.12 (e) Manage Main Application Windows

In Neuralog Desktop, users can change the layout of the main application windows. The
windows can be moved around, and the new layout can be saved. There are inner and outer
areas where a window can be moved. Each area has four sections within them. A 'shadow'
appears over each section when hovered over. Place a window in the shadowed area where
you wish.

Example 1: Windows Layout

To change the windows layout

· Put your cursor to the title bar of the window you want to move.
· Hold and drag the window to the inner or outer sections. This is done, while dragging a
window, by dragging the cursor above one of the tiny floating boxes

Each window has the following right click options

127
 · Float
· Dock
· Auto
· Hide
· Close

More examples of windows layout

Example 2: Windows Layout

128
 Example 3: Windows Layout

3.6.13 Set Preferences

In Neuralog Desktop, users can use the Preferences to set top interpreters and interpreter
aliases, manage well document types, and more (see more options illustrated below).
From the main menu, select Preferences, and pick a menu item.

129
3.6.13 (a) Set Top Interpreters

In Neuralog Desktop, users can set the Tops Interpreters priority just like in NeuraSection.
(That is, for the same top, the item on top of the list will take precedence.) These settings are
carried over to NeuraSection or vice versa.
From the top menu, select Preferences Tops Interpreters….

3.6.13 (b) Set Interpreter Alias

130
In addition to setting Tops Interpreters, interpreter aliases (names of interpreters) can also be
set or deleted in Neuralog Desktop by going to the Preferences.

To set Interpreter Alias

· From the top menu, select Preferences Interpreter Alias...

· The Set Alias dialog opens.

· Enter an Alias, and click OK.

· If the alias has no tops, you will be told and then asked if you want to continue.
· A confirmation dialog displays for the new added alias as shown above, click OK.

To delete Interpreter Alias

(An option only if interpreter alias has been set either via Desktop or NeuraSection.)
· From the top menu, select Preferences Interpreter Alias...
· The Set Alias dialog opens with the current alias being displayed.

· Check the Delete Alias checkbox. Then click OK.

· A confirmation dialog opens with the user's credentials as shown above, click OK.

3.6.13 (c) Manage Well Log Types

131
Well log types can be added and/or deleted within Neuralog Desktop.

To add a well log type

· From the top menu, select Preferences Manage Log Types....

· To add a new Well Log Type, click the Add New button.
· In the dialog, type in the new log type. Then click OK.

· The new log type is added to the list in the Manage Well Log Types dialog, as

132
 shown above.
· Click Close.

To delete a well log type

(NOTE: A log type that already exists or is associated with a well in the project cannot be
deleted.)
· From the top menu, select Preferences Manage Log Types....
· Select the log type you want to delete.
· Click the Delete button. You will be asked if you really want to make the deletion.

· Click Yes. The new log type is deleted from the list in the Manage Well Log Types
dialog.
· Click Close.

3.6.13 (d) Manage Well Document Types

Well document types can be added and/or deleted within Neuralog Desktop.

To add a well document type

· From the top menu, select Preferences Manage Document Types....

133
 · Click the Add New button.
· Type in the new document type. Then click OK.

· The new document type is added to the list in the Manage Well Document Types
dialog, as shown above.
· Click Close.

To delete a well document type

A document type that already exists or is associated with a well cannot be deleted. If the well
associated with a document type is deleted, all the logs and well documents associated with the
deleted well will be deleted as well.

134
 · From the top menu, select Preferences Manage Document Types....
· Select the document type you want to delete.
· Click the Delete button. You will be asked if you really want to make the deletion.

· Click Yes. The new document type is deleted from the list in the Manage Well Document
Types dialog.
· Click Close.

3.6.14 Manage Strat Panel

The Strat Panel can be managed within Neuralog Desktop through the Global Editor menu.
From the top menu, select Global Editor Strat Panel....

3.6.15 Filter Wells Query using NeuraSection Tool

The Well Query/Filter dialog can be accessed in three different ways:

· The first way (1) is through Query > Well Query…. The second way (2) is through

135
 Advanced Well Search in the “Search” Tree View. In these cases, the search results
appear in the Well Grid.

· The third way (3) is through the Filter Wells icon ( ) from the NeuraSection
toolbar. In this case, the search results are highlighted in the map. There is the
additional checkbox: Apply To Wells In Well Grid, which limits the search to what is
displayed in the Well Grid. The search results are highlighted in red.

Using the NeuraSection Toolbar, click the Filter Wells button tool.

136
4 Add New Well + Logs to the Database
Wells contain descriptive well header information, including the following: API/UWI number,
well name and operator, and status and log file(s). A log file may be a well log image or an LAS
file.
When you create a well in NeuraSection, you create a database entry that will store
information about the well. The well entry can be entered manually into the database, or
imported to obtain well information from some other data source.

There are several ways to create a well and obtain its header and log file(s):

· Import Well / Log Data, then associated Image/LAS file to the well:
o Import Well / Log Data
o Import a Well Log Image
o Import an LAS File
o Import Custom Curve Data
o Associate Log Image and/or LAS File to Well

· Import Image/LAS file, then enter well data:

o Import a Well Log Image
o Import an LAS File
o Import Custom Curve Data
o Set Well Log Properties

· Create empty well, enter well data, then assign image:

o Create an empty well
o Set Well Log Properties
o Assign an image (or other log file) to this well

137
5 Import Data
· Well / Log Data
· Log Files
o Image Files
o LAS Files
o Custom Curve Data
· NeuraMap Data

5.1 Well/Log Data Import

NeuraSection can import well information directly from a wide range of industry-standard
formats. Well information can also be entered manually.

To import well data

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· In the Import Well Data panel, under Select Import File type, select the desired file
format.

Import File Types:

138
· Generic ASCII and Excel Loader
· GCS Well and Top File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V2 File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V3 File
· GeoGraphix WellBase V4 File
· IHS Energy Well Fixed 197 File
· IHS Energy Well Fixed 297 File
· IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File
· MMS Offshore Directional Survey
· Shape File Well Spots
· Tobin WCS File
· Custom Table
· GCS Log Image Files
· GeoGraphix Depth Registration ASCII Files
· IHS Energy XML Depth Registration
· MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs
· MMS Log CD
· NeuraLog (NLGX) File
· NeuraLog (NLGX) File Directory Batch Load
· PETRA Log Image Calibration Files
· TGS (A2D) smartRASTER
· TGS (A2D) SIF Files
· LAS File Loader (Batch)
· TIFF File Loader (Batch)
· Custom Table
· Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch)
· Well Document Loader (Batch)
· Field Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Country Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Region Documents (ASCII/Excel)

139
 · Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel)

5.1.1 Generic Ascii and Excel Loader (.txt, .xls, and more)

ASCII and Excel files can be imported directly into your NeuraSection project. Columns of data
may be selected or ignored. (The last import format is automatically remembered.) This import
format works the same for both ASCII and Excel Files.
ASCII files may be .txt files - or you could treat any file as a text file. Excel files end in .xls or
.xlsx.
(NOTE: The import file must at least have a UWI/API associated with a well - or Well Name
and Number.)

Import data to multiple wells

(Must contain a column with API numbers or Well Name and Number.)
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· Under Import File Type, select Generic ASCII and Excel Loader from the dropdown
(if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file. The corresponding dialog should automatically open.
Otherwise, select the Import File browse button.
o Importing an XLS or XLSX file is almost identical to importing a text file - with one
key difference to be mentioned shortly. In the Generic ASCII Loader, you can
choose an XLS or XLSX file. This will open the Excel File Loader.
· Select the file, and click Next.

140
· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
o For XLS or XLSX files, the file is automatically delimited properly (so there's no
need to select a Delimiter).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

141
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active. Then select the appropriate item from the list. The check boxes
allow you to filter for the types of items you need.

142
 · Click Next.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

Import data to single well

Same process as above except it will be assigned to a well in the database.

143
5.1.2 GCS Well and Top File (.gcs)

Imports header and top data.

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select GCS Well and Top Data from the dropdown (if not
already visible). These files end with ".gcs".
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

144
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

145
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

146
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o

147
 u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a

148
 d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t

149
 e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e

150
 d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.3 GeoGraphix WellBase V2 (.asc, .txt files)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V2 from the dropdown (if not
already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

151
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

152
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

153
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o

154
 u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a

155
 d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t

156
 e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e

157
 d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.4 GeoGraphix WellBase V3 (.wb3, .asc., .txt files)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V3 from the dropdown (if not
already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

158
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

159
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

160
 o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o
u

161
 a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a
d

162
 y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t
e

163
 r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d

164
 .

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.5 GeoGraphix WellBase V4 (.wb4, .txt files)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V4 from the dropdown (if not
already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

165
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o

166
 u
n
t
s

f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

167
 i
f

y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

168
 a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s

169
 t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

170
 a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.6 IHS Energy Well Fixed 197 (.PID or .d97)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select IHS Energy Well Fixed 197 from the dropdown (if not
already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File Browse button.
· Select the file.

171
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set). The UWI/API Enforcer is the utility
used to standardize the UWI/API string length in your project. It can be set on the
Import panel - or from the Edit > Well UWI/API Length... menu option.
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

172
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

173
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

174
 f

y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

175
 a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

176
 m
u
s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

177
 b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells.
· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.7 IHS Energy Well Fixed 297 (.97f)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select IHS Energy Well Fixed 297 from the dropdown (if not
already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

178
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

179
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

180
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.
T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

181
 y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

182
 l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u

183
 s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

184
 e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells.
· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.8 IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File (.98f)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File from the dropdown (if
not already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

185
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

186
 a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a

187
 t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

188
 t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s

189
 e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

190
 s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.
· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells.
· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.9 MMS Offshore Directional Survey (.txt files)

NeuraSection can import MMS Offshore Deviation Survey data (which come as .txt files).
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select MMS Offshore Deviation Survey from the dropdown (if
not already visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

191
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System for data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

192
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

193
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

194
 y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

195
 a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

196
 u
s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

197
 b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad). It
will tell you which wells were updated successfully.

5.1.10 Shape File Well Spots (.shp)

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For Import File Type, select Shape File Well Spots from the dropdown (if not already
visible).

198
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

199
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active. Then select the appropriate item from the list. The check boxes
allow you to filter for the types of items you need.

200
· Click Next.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

201
· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad). It
will tell you which wells were updated successfully.

202
5.1.11 Tobin WCS File (.wcs)

Imports well header data.

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select Tobin WCS from the dropdown if it is not already visible.
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

203
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c

204
 o
u
n
t
s

f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

205
 s
,

i
f

y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a

206
 t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

207
 y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h

208
 o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.12 GCS Log Image Files (.mdb, .MDB)

NeuraSection can import calibrated images from GCS using their Log Image Files.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select GCS Log Image Files from the dropdown (if not already
visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

209
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

210
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

211
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o

212
 u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a

213
 d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t

214
 e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e

215
 d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.13 GeoGraphix Depth Registration ASCII Files

NeuraSection can import calibrated images from GeoGraphix using their depth registered
ASCII files.
This time, you are not just selecting a file. Rather, you must select an entire folder. Your
selected folder must contain both TIFF and .dra files.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select GeoGraphix Depth Registration ASCII Files from
the dropdown (if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the file.

216
· Again - this time, you are not just selecting a file. Rather, you must select an entire
folder. Your selected folder must contain both TIFF and .dra files.
· Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

217
 · The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.14 IHS Energy XML Depth Registration

For those with an Enverus subscription (formerly Drillinginfo), NeuraSection’s NeuraWell

XML format is used to transfer data to/from Enverus.

218
5.1.15 MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs

Importing well headers, tops, production data, images, and depth registration data is
easy and flexible using a direct COM connection into your MJLogSleuth database.
Important Notes:
1. You must register the COM connectivity on your PC in order to use this import, if it
wasn’t done during the initial installation of NeuraSection. Your current Neuralog
Product Suite CD will have the COM Registration option on the Product Launcher.
2. MJ LogSleuth must be accessible from your PC.
3. MJ Systems LogSleuth Cache Interface may be turned on through the cache.ini file.

To Import

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….

· For the Import File Type, select MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs from the dropdown
menu (if not already visible).
· Click Next to continue.

219
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,

220
 Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t

221
 s

f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

222
 y
o
u

a
r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r

223
 e
a
d
y

i
n

y
o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

224
 e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d

225
 l
e
d
.

· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

MJ Systems LogSleuth Cache Option Interface

The NeuraSection/MJ LogSleuth interface allows the user to access MJ images directly -
without creating copies of the images.

Description of Functionality:

With MJ Caching turned on, when images are imported from MJ LogSleuth, they are, in
technical terms, truncated to a length of zero so they take up no disk space. The images
remain zero length until they are opened in NeuraSection. At this point, the images “become
real”.

Enable Functionality:

To enable this functionality, shared image caching must be used.

· Select File Preferences...
· In the Default Settings dialog, select Application.
· Select Image Caching and click Select.
· In the Cache Preferences dialog, be sure you have entered a Shared Image Cache
Directory.
· Afterward, check the MJ Caching checkbox.

226
 OR
· To set manually, go to the top-level NeuraSection project directory (e.g.,
C:\nds\projects\). In that directory is a file named cache.ini.
o Open with Notepad. Add the following line: “MJ_ON”.

Disable Functionality:

· To disable this functionality, go back to Cache Preferences dialog (see above).

De-select MJ Caching.
OR
· Simply delete MJ_ON from the cache.ini file.

Notes / Troubleshooting:
1. LogSleuth must have the correct project/database loaded. This means the project that
was loaded when the images were originally exported must be loaded when the
images are opened in NeuraSection. If this is not the case, NeuraSection will display
an error message stating such.
2. MJ LogSleuth must be properly installed on the client PC. If there is an error when
accessing images, make sure that LogSleuth is installed properly.
3. The latest version of LogSleuth (2.6.2.5 or higher) must be installed. Earlier versions
may not have the functionality necessary.

5.1.16 MMS Log CD (.html and .htm files)

Imports API/UWI numbers with associated TIFF log images purchased from the Bureau of
Ocean Energy Management, Regulation and Enforcement (BOEMRE) - formerly known
as MMS (https://www.boem.gov/Reorganization/).

227
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select MMS Log CD from the dropdown menu (if not already
visible).
· Browse for the import file by selecting the Import File browse button(s).
· Select the Index.html file supplied with the MMS Log Images.

· Select logs to import.

228
 T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

p
a
n
e
l

a
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

229
 f
o
r

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.
T
h
a
t

i
s
,

i
f

y
o
u

a
230
 r
e

i
m
p
o
r
t
i
n
g

w
e
l
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

t
h
a
t

i
s

a
l
r
e
a
d
y

i
n

231
 o
u
r

N
e
u
r
a
S
e
c
t
i
o
n

d
a
t
a
b
a
s
e
,

y
o
u

m
u
s
t

d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

h
o
w

232
 t
h
e

d
u
p
l
i
c
a
t
e

d
a
t
a

s
h
o
u
l
d

b
e

h
a
n
d
l
e
d
.

· Set Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.
· Reduce DPI on selected images (OPTIONAL):

233
 · Click Finish.
· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a status panel showing information
about the wells:

· When the import is complete, the panel is automatically put away.

5.1.17 NeuraLog (NLGX) File (.nlgx, .nlg, .wlg)

NeuraLog can be used to calibrate images for NeuraSection. If the Well Information in
NeuraLog is completed, images, depth grids, and even header information can also be
imported. NeuraLog files can be loaded one at a time - or in folder batches.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· Select Import File Type: NeuraLog (NLGX) File from the drop-down, if it is not already

234
 visible.
· Browse for the import file (.nlgx, .nlg, or .wlg) by selecting the Import File browse
button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· A pop-up dialog will now ask you to enter the UWI and/or enter the Well Name and
Operator. This should automatically be populated, but you may need to make
adjustments. You can also browse for a well by clicking Browse the Database.
· After making your adjustments, click OK.

235
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

236
5.1.18 NeuraLog (NLGX) File Directory Batch Load

NeuraLog can be used to calibrate images for NeuraSection. If the Well Information in
NeuraLog is completed, images, depth grids, and even header information can also be
imported. NeuraLog files can be loaded one at a time - or in folder batches.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select NeuraLog (NLGX) File Directory Batch Load from the
dropdown menu, if it is not already visible.
· Browse for the folder containing the import files (.nlgx, .nlg, or .wlg) by selecting the
Import Directory browse button.
· Select the folder.

237
· Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.

238
 · Click Finish.
· As the wells are added to the database, you will see a series of status panels.

· When the imports are complete, the panels are automatically put away.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad). It
will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.19 PETRA Log Image Calibration Files

NeuraSection can import calibrated images from PETRA using their Log Image Calibration
Files.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select PETRA Log Image Calibration Files from the
dropdown (if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button. This
folder should contain both TIFF and LIC files.
· Select the folder. Choose whether to include subdirectories.

239
· Click the Next button to continue.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).
· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.

240
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.20 TGS (A2D) smartRASTER (.txt files)

Use this format to import older data purchased from A2D.

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select A2D Technologies smartRASTER from the dropdown
(if not already visible).
· The file browser should open automatically. Otherwise, click the Import File browse

241
 button.
· Select the file.
· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

5.1.21 TGS (A2D) SIF Files

SIF is clearly marked on CDs.

· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select A2D Technologies SIF Files from the dropdown
menu (if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the folder.

242
 · Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

5.1.22 LAS File Loader (Batch)

When using this feature, it is recommended that your LAS files have one of the following
properties:
· API/UWI numbers in the well header
OR
· Filenames named by API/UWI number
In the current version of NL Desktop, the LAS files can still be imported even without UWIs.
Under Well Grid, such files will have the filename in the UWI column - up to the first X
characters (except for Blank Sidetrack/Completion Digits, which are set to 0). If the name is

243
less than X characters, the empty spaces are filled with zeros.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select LAS File Loader from the dropdown menu (if not already
visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the folder. Choose whether to include subdirectories.

· Enter the length of the UWIs. For files named after their UWIs, also enter the file

244
 prefix (if any).
· Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor. It will tell you which
files were imported successfully and which were not.

245
5.1.23 TIFF File Loader (Batch)

When using this feature, it is recommended that your TIFF files have filenames named by
API/UWI number.
In the current version of NL Desktop, the TIFF files can still be imported regardless of filename.
Under Well Grid, such files will have the filename in the UWI column - up to the first X
characters (except for Blank Sidetrack/Completion Digits, which are set to 0). If the name is
less than X characters, the empty spaces are filled with zeros.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select TIFF File Loader from the dropdown (if not already
visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the folder. Choose whether to include subdirectories.
· For subdirectories named by UWI, you can choose Set UWI By Directory. This
feature uses the name of the subdirectory directly containing the file.
· Enter the length of the UWIs. For files named after their UWIs, also enter the file prefix
(if any).

246
· Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Set Map System of data (if not LAT/LON).
· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

247
5.1.24 Extra Options for NL Desktop

Import File Types available in Neuralog Desktop only:

· Custom Table
· Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch)
· Well Document Loader (Batch)
· Field Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Country Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Region Documents (ASCII/Excel)
· Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel)

5.1.24.1 Custom Table

This feature behaves similarly to Generic ASCII and Excel Loader Import. IMPORTANT
NOTE: This is an option for Neuralog Desktop - not for NeuraSection.
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select Custom Table from the dropdown (if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file. The corresponding dialog should automatically open.
Otherwise, select the Import File browse button.

248
· Select the file.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).

· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

249
· The file you import should include column headers in Row 1. When you pick a file to
import, the names of the columns to import should be automatically filled thanks to
these column headers.
· If the names need adjusting, then click on a column header to make it active. From
there, select the appropriate item from the list.
· If you need a custom name, click “<Set Column Name>”. Then click on the target
column header, and enter the name in the pop-up dialog.

250
· Finally, be sure to fill in the “Custom Table Name” (as shown above).

· By default, all columns are read as strings (normal text). A column can also be read as
numbers or dates. Change the setting for a column by clicking “<Set Column Type>”;
251
 then click on the target column header.

· Finally, click Finish. A text note should open, confirming the import.

5.1.24.2 Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch)

The Area Tree contains several default folders. For documents that don’t quite belong in the
other folders, you can add your own Custom Folders to the Custom Folders folder.
The easiest way to do this is to have a folder on your drive already arranged the way you
want. Moreover, you can name the subdirectories according to Document (Doc) Type.
In another situation, you may want to load a bunch of logs and then sort through them
manually. Custom folders can be great for this, too.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select Custom Folder Document Loader (Batch) from the
dropdown (if not already visible).
· Browse for the import file folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the folder. Choose whether to include subdirectories.
· For subdirectories named by Doc Type, you can choose Set Doc Type by Folder.

252
 This feature uses the name of the subdirectory directly holding the file.

· Click Finish.
· In Logs/Documents, the Doc Types appear under the Description column.

253
 · Custom folders can contain only “Documents” - not “Logs”. Any log files imported into
a custom folder will be treated as Documents. The only way to treat a log file as a
“Log” is to assign it to a well.

To Assign to Well
· Go to Logs Documents, and right click on the target document(s). Select Assign to
Well….
· In the Assign Docs to Well dialog, click Select Well….
· In the pop-up dialog, choose the well. (Type in a UWI / Well Name / Operator, or
browse the database.) IMPORTANT: The well must already be in the database;
otherwise, you must go to Global Editor Well Headers….

254
 · Click OK.
· Back in the main dialog, click Next.

· Decide whether to assign as (a) “Well Log(s)” or “Well Doc(s)”.

· Click Log Type…, and select Log Type.
· Finally, click Finish.

5.1.24.3 Well Document Loader (Batch)

When using this feature, it is recommended that your files have filenames named by API/UWI

255
number.
In the current version of NL Desktop, the files can still be imported regardless of filename.
Under Well Grid, such files will have the filename in the UWI column - up to the first X
characters (except for Blank Sidetrack/Completion Digits, which are set to 0). If the name is
less than X characters, the empty spaces are filled with zeros.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select Well Document Loader (Batch) from the dropdown
menu (if not already visible).
· Browse for the target folder by selecting the Import Folder browse button.
· Select the folder. Choose whether to include subdirectories.
· For subdirectories named by Doc Type, you can choose Set Doc Type by Folder.
This feature uses the name of the subdirectory directly holding the file.
· Enter the length of the UWIs. For files named after their UWIs, also enter the file prefix
(if any). To assign a single well to all files, you can also click Assign Well to Data.

256
 · Click the Next button to continue.

· Set the Default UWI/API Length (if not already set).

· Select data types (Well Headers, Formation Tops, Faults, Locations/Directionals,
Production Tests, Logs, Monthly Production, and/or Top/Bottom Location), if needed.
· Click Finish.

5.1.24.4 Field Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of field documents and have them automatically assigned to their

257
appropriate fields (field names automatically created). In addition, they can automatically be
assigned to their appropriate file types.
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Field Name” and “Document Pathname”.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select Field Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the dropdown
menu (if not already visible).
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

258
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active; then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Field Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

259
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.24.5 Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of operator documents and have them automatically assigned to their
appropriate operators (operator names automatically created). In addition, they can
260
automatically be assigned to their appropriate file types.
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Operator Name” and “Document Pathname”.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select Operator Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the dropdown
(if not already visible).
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

261
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active; then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Operator Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

262
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.24.6 Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of prospect documents and have them automatically assigned to their
appropriate prospects (prospect names automatically created). In addition, they can
263
automatically be assigned to their appropriate file types.
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Prospect Name” and “Document Pathname”.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For Import File Type, select Prospect Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the dropdown
(if not already visible).
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

264
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active; then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Prospect Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

265
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.24.7 Country Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of country documents and have them automatically assigned to their
appropriate countries (country names automatically created). In addition, they can automatically
be assigned to their appropriate file types.

266
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Country Name” and “Document Pathname”. Make sure the country names are
standard names that the program recognizes.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select Country Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the
dropdown menu if it is not already visible.
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

267
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active. Then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Country Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

268
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.24.8 Region Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of region documents and have them automatically assigned to their
appropriate fields (region names automatically created). In addition, they can automatically be
assigned to their appropriate file types.

269
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Region Name” and “Document Pathname”.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select Region Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the dropdown
menu if it is not already visible.
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

270
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active. Then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Region Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

271
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.1.24.9 Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel)

You can load a batch of documents for custom folders, and you can have them automatically
assigned to their appropriate folders (folder names automatically created). In addition, they can
automatically be assigned to their appropriate file types.

272
For this operation, you must create an ASCII/Excel spreadsheet with at least the following
columns: “Folder Name” and “Document Pathname”.

To Import
· Go to File Import Well/Log Data….
· For the Import File Type, select Custom Folder Documents (ASCII/Excel) from the
dropdown (if not already visible).
· Click the Import File browse button.
· Select the file.

· Click the Next button to continue.

· Select the delimiter (e.g., comma, tab, semicolon, or space).
· Choose which row to start the import. (For example, the first row is most likely the
header, which you would want to leave out.)
· Click Next.

273
· It is now time to specify the properties each column stands for. Click on a column
header to make it active. Then select the appropriate item from the list. Again, one
column must stand for “Folder Name”, and another must be for “Document
Pathname”. This is the bare minimum.

274
 · Click Finish.
· The following file is generated and opened with the default editor (should be Notepad).
It will tell you which files were imported successfully and which were not.

5.2 Map Data

Map Data (contours and faults) files generated by NeuraMap can be imported directly into
NeuraSection.

275
The NeuraMap Data Import allows the following:
· Create a New Area of Interest (AOI) and Surface Map based on the LAT/LON extents
of the data being imported.
OR
· Import directly into a Surface Map of an existing Area of Interest.

You can import contours and simple faults digitized in NeuraMap into ...
· an existing Area of Interest.
OR
· You can have the import create a new Map in a new Area of Interest.

276
277
5.3 Well Logs
For well logs, NeuraSection allows import of both images and LAS files. NeuraSection
supports LAS versions 1.2, 2.0, and 3.0. This program can import the following types of
images: TIFF, IMG, MJ, JPG, PNG, LAS, PDF, CGM, and EMF. NeuraSection can also
import Curve Data from text or XLS/XLSX file as long as file is properly formatted.

5.3.1 Log Images

Importing images adds their file names, complete with path, to the project database as a log file
and opens the images in the viewing window. This process is used for any scanned image
(such as TIFFs).
NOTE: If images are scanned using the wells' API# as the naming convention, they will

278
AUTOLINK with matching well entries in your current database or create a new well.

To import log images

· Select File Import Log(s)....

· Browse for the images you wish to load (e.g., TIFF or JPG).

OR
· Open Windows Explorer and select image file(s).
· Drag-and-drop the images onto the NeuraSection Main Application Panel.
o The progress stretcher at the bottom of the window will update as each image file
loads.

See also:

· Input Well Header Data Manually

· Open Log List View
· Add TIFF/LAS File to Existing Well
· Remove Image/LAS File
· LAS Batch File Loader

279
5.3.2 LAS Files

LAS versions 1.2, 2.0, and 3.0 can be loaded into NeuraSection. LAS files are imported and
viewed in much the same way as image files. When an LAS file is imported, its name and file
path are added to the project database. Just as with images, the LAS file is loaded into
NeuraSection during the import and displayed in the viewing window.
One important difference between LAS files and images, however, is that some (but not all)
LAS files contain well data such as the well API number and name in their file header. When
this is the case, NeuraSection will automatically link the LAS file to the well entry in the
database.
Before importing LAS files, the user may customize the curve template to set a consistent LAS
display layout for all imported files. The LAS Curve Template is shipped with a default set of
curves and settings, but any or all of them may be changed.
NOTE: If LAS Files are named using the wells' API# as the naming convention, they will
AUTOLINK with matching well entries in your current database or create a new well.

To import LAS Files

· Select File Import Log(s)....

· Browse for the LAS files you wish to load.

OR
· Open Windows Explorer and select LAS file(s). Drag and drop the files onto the

280
 NeuraSection main application window.
o The progress stretcher at the bottom of the window will update as each image file
loads.

Other LAS Related topics:

· LAS Curve Template

· Input Well Header Data Manually
· Add TIFF/LAS File to Existing Well
· Remove Image/LAS File
· LAS Batch File Loader

5.3.3 Custom Curve Data

Sometimes users have spreadsheet data with curve information either collected in a field or
curve values derived from algorithms outside of conventional software. Users desire this curve
data to be imported and utilized in their Cross Section and other areas in the analysis process.

NeuraSection will import Custom Curve Data from any text delimited file or from XLS or
XLSX spreadsheet and convert those into LAS file(s). Custom Curve Data Import supports
single or multi-well data files. When source file contains curve data associated with multiple
UWIs, NeuraSection will create LAS file for each well, automatically associate file with
matching well in the project or create new well when UWI from the source file does not exist in
the project.

To import Custom Curve Data Files

· Select File Import Curve Data....
· Browse for the text or XLS/XLSX file you wish to load.

NeuraSection supports two input data formats :

281
 · Curve Data
· Step Curve Data

5.3.3.1 Curve Data

Curve Data can be imported from any text file - as long as it is delimited by commas, or
spaces, or tabs, etc. Such formats include TXT, CSV, and any other file that can be treated as
text.
Curve Data can also be imported from XLS or XLSX files. The workflow is almost identical to
that for importing a text file.

After importing, Curve Data is converted into LAS file(s). Curve Data Import supports single
or multi-well data files. When source file contains curve data associated with multiple UWIs,
NeuraSection will create LAS file for each well, automatically associate file with matching well
in the project or create new well when UWI from the source file does not exist in the project.

To import Curve Data Files

· Select File Import Curve Data....
· Browse for the text or XLS/XLSX file you wish to load.

282
In the following example we import a XLSX file:

· With Generic ASCII Loader, we open a XLSX file. We are brought to Import Curve
Data: Step 1 of 2 dialog where preview of the data is shown.

· Select Sheet name data should be imported from.

· Make sure to start the import on the first row containing data from the columns.
· When source file is a text file, Import Curve Data : Step 1 of 2 will require appropriate
Delimiter to be set:

· Click on Next.
283
· In the Import Curve Data : Step 2 of 2 select Depth column that is mandatory. UWI
column is also mandatory for multi-well source file. To map column:
o First, click on the header of the column containing Depth.
o Next, go to the list of fields and click "Depth".
o The target column header is updated to "Depth"
o Repeat steps for "UWI" column, if needed.
o Note that by default, column header names are imported from the source file,
from the row above one where import starts. When source file is well formatted,
minimal or none mapping correction is required.

· The other columns stand for each curve in the file. In a well formatted import file, the
proper curve names should already be set. If not, here is how to change curve names
(mnemonics):
o Click on a target curve column header.
o Go to the list of fields and click on <Set Curve Name>.
o In the Set Curve Name dialog, type in the new curve name.
o Click on OK.
o Note that column header for target curve now shows new curve name.
o Repeat these steps for each curve you want to modify name.
· Columns that contain no data for import (e.g. "comment") have to be set as Ignore.
Otherwise, those column(s) will be imported as another curve(s).
· Make sure that Step Curve is NOT checked.
· If source file contains curve data for multiple wells, Multiple Wells in File check box
has to be checked and UWI column has to be mapped. Otherwise, Multiple Wells in
File should not be checked. When UWI column is not mapped, parser will assume that
data is associated with a single well, and user will be asked to assign log to a well after
loading process is done.
· If the depths are random in the source file, NeuraSection will find an appropriate depth
step when generating LAS file. If the user checks Apply check box under Curve Depth
Step section, the user typed depth step will be applied instead. Warning: This could
cause invalid data.
· Select Import Data UNIT (FT or M) that matches source data depth unit of measure.
· Restore Curve Names will reset column headers names to names parsed from the
284
 source file.
· Click on Finish.

The imported Curve Data are open as a LAS File.

5.3.3.2 Step Curve Data

Custom Step Curve Import is a special case of Custom Curve Data Import which parser
"understands" step curve and automatically calculates depth step, curve depths and curve
values from information included in a source import file.

Step Curve Data can be imported from any text file - as long as it is delimited by commas, or
spaces, or tabs, etc. Such formats include TXT, CSV, and any other file that can be treated as
text.
Step Curve Data can also be imported from XLS or XLSX files. The workflow is almost
identical to that for importing a text file.

After importing, Step Curve Data is converted into LAS file(s). Step Curve Data Import
285
supports single or multi-well data files. When source file contains curve data associated with
multiple UWIs, NeuraSection will create LAS file for each well, automatically associate file with
matching well in the project or create new well when UWI from the source file does not exist in
the project.

To import Step Curve Data Files

· Select File Import Curve Data....
· Browse for the text or XLS/XLSX file you wish to load.

In the following example we import a XLSX file:

· With Generic ASCII Loader, we open a XLSX file. We are brought to Import Curve
Data: Step 1 of 2 dialog where preview of the data is shown.

· Select Sheet name data should be imported from.

· Make sure to start the import on the first row containing data from the columns

286
· When source file is a text file, Import Curve Data : Step 1 of 2 will require appropriate
Delimiter to be set:

· Click on Next.
· In the Import Curve Data : Step 2 of 2 select Depth and Depth2 columns that are
mandatory. "Depth" value indicates depth where step curve value starts and "Depth2"
indicates depth where step curve value ends. "Depth" value in the current row has to
match "Depth2" value in the previous row (unless it is first row). UWI column is also
mandatory for multi-well source file. To map columns:
o First, click on the header of the column containing Depth.
o Next, go to the list of fields and click "Depth".
o The target column header is updated to "Depth".
o Repeat steps for "Depth2" column.
o Repeat steps for "UWI" column, if needed.
o Note that by default, column header names are imported from the source file,
from the row above one where import starts. When source file is well formatted,
minimal or none mapping correction is required.

287
 · The other columns stand for each curve in the file. In a well formatted import file, the
proper curve names should already be set. If not, here is how to change curve names
(mnemonics):
o Click on a target curve column header.
o Go to the list of fields and click on <Set Curve Name>.
o In the Set Curve Name dialog, type in the new curve name.
o Click on OK.
o Note that column header for target curve now shows new curve name.
o Repeat these steps for each curve you want to modify name.
· Columns that contain no data for import (e.g. "Notes") have to be set as Ignore.
Otherwise, that column(s) will be imported as another curve.
· Make sure that Step Curve IS checked.
· If source file contains curve data for multiple wells, Multiple Wells in File check box
has to be checked and UWI column has to be mapped. Otherwise, Multiple Wells in
File should not be checked. When UWI column is not mapped, parser will assume that
data is associated with a single well, and user will be asked to assign log to a well after
loading process is done.
· Select Import Data UNIT (FT or M) that matches source data depth unit of measure.
· Based on Depth / Depth2 values and selected Import Data Unit, NeuraSection will find
an appropriate depth step when generating LAS file. If the user checks Apply check box
under Curve Depth Step section, the user typed depth step will be applied instead.
Warning: This could cause invalid data.
· Clear Data Names will reset column headers, by remove all column mapping.
· Click on Finish.

The imported Step Curve Data are open as a LAS File.

288
5.3.4 LAS Templates

Before importing LAS files, the user may customize the LAS Templates to set a consistent LAS
display layout for all imported files - or for selected files. A Global Template is shipped and
installed with a default set of curves and settings, but any or all of them may be changed. This
template will be seen and used by all projects under the Current Project Group. In addition, a
Project Template may be created which is initially populated by the global settings, but can be
changed and used for the project it was created in only.
NOTE: The template can also be 'run' on selected curves in existing LAS files by clicking on
the Apply to Current Project button.

289
To set/edit the LAS Template - Curve Tab
You may customize the LAS Curve Template to set a consistent LAS display layout for all
opened files. This can be done before opening so that it applies to all files opened, or it can be
applied to all open files, if not set to the desired template first.
· First, be sure you have an LAS file open. Then in the Well / Logs ribbon, select
Well/Logs > LAS Template.
· This opens the Las Template panel. From here, select the Curve tab.
· (NOTE: Grids appear in their own tab now.)
· See the figures below for more details. Also, see important notes at the bottom.

290
To set/edit the LAS Template - Curve Fill Tab
You may customize the LAS Curve Fills Template to set a consistent LAS display layout for all
opened files. This can be done before opening so that it applies to all files opened, or it can be
applied to all open files, if not set to the desired template first.
· First, be sure you have an LAS file open. Then in the Well / Logs ribbon, select
Well/Logs > LAS Template.
· This opens the Las Template panel. From here, go to the Curve Fill tab.
· See the figures below for more details. Also, see important notes at the bottom.

291
To set/edit the LAS Grids - Grids Tab

· First, be sure you have an LAS file open. Then in the Well / Logs ribbon, select
Well/Logs > LAS Template.
· This opens the Las Template panel. From here, go to the Grids tab.
· See the figure below for more details. Also, see important notes at the bottom.

292
Important Notes

· The Apply button is for saving changes to the template. To apply the template to open
documents, click Apply to: All Open Files or (where applicable) Apply To: Selected
Files….
· For Curve and Curve Fill:
o Under "Template(s)", the Default template is selected by default.
o To create a new template, click New. In the pop-up dialog, enter your chosen name.
§ In the table of curve settings, you can add entries manually (under this table,
click Add New).
§ Or you can add from an open LAS file (click Add from LAS), which will add new
curve settings based on the current display in the selected file.
o To make a copy of a template, click Copy.

5.3.5 LAS Properties

NeuraSection supports LAS versions 1.2, 2.0, and 3.0. LAS files are opened and viewed in
much the same way as image files. A mini-header is displayed at the top of the LAS file by
default, but it can also be shown with a full header and/or comments. Tracks and curves are

293
displayed with a customizable pre-defined template. As with TIFF images, LAS files have right
click options.

The right click commands of a LAS file:

294
6 Online Data Source(s)
Online Data Sources have been discontinued at this time.

295
7 Export Data

Export Options:
· Export Well Data.
· Export Log Images.
· Export Map Data.

296
8 Open Log List View
Before we assign logs, let’s discuss the Open Log List View first. Knowing its functionality will
make assigning logs a little easier.
The Open Log List View displays a tabular listing of all open log documents. This view is
opened automatically when new logs are imported/opened; this way, you can quickly set them
up for use. You can enter required information directly into the table, or you can fill more
detailed information in the Well Properties panel.

To show Open Log List View

· Select Well / Logs Ribbon Log List View (if it’s not already open).

Table Functionality
(NOTE: When cursor is over a log document, its line in Open Log List View will highlight.)
· Log Filename: Double-click on a filename to maximize log window above table.
Doing so enables the ability to scroll to the header for easy well data input.
· UWI: If you type in a UWI that already exists in the database, the data will automatically
fill in.
· Interval: When marked as Unregistered, you can double-click (on the word
“Unregistered”) and the log window will maximize and turn on the Depth Marker tool (if
not already active). Then you can register the log.
· Assign... button (Well column): If well data already exists in the project for the

297
 selected log, you can assign it with this button. A well list will appear for you to select the
well.
· Properties... button (Well column): Once a log has well properties, the Assign...
button turns to Properties..., allowing easy access to the full properties of the log.
· Information Block: The information block to the side of the Well column walks the
user through the first couple steps of assigning/registering a new log document.

298
9 Set Well Log Properties
The following sections discuss various properties available for well log documents. These
include display options, header information, well data and more.
You now have a set of well database entries, images, and LAS files that have been tied
together through the Open Log List View. Following is a detailed look at each of these well data
options.

9.1 Well Header Tab

The Well Header tab holds well and location information. These data are used to display well
information in the Project Map, Areas of Interest, and Cross Sections.

To display or input well information

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file.

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties.
· Select Well Header tab.

LAS Header
If the LAS file has header information filled in, it will display in the mini-header as shown below.
This is the default view. The following options are also available:
· Display header in International, Spanish, or US.
· Display full header with parameters and run information.

299
 · Display comments on mini or full headers.
· Display a custom logo.

(Also see Input Well Header Manually.)

9.2 Display Tab

Adjusting Well Log Display Properties
Well logs come in standard sizes and may be scanned at various resolutions. To assure that all
wells appear scaled the same in your Cross Section presentation, NeuraSection normalizes
the log images and LAS files.
In addition, an option for LAS files only, Log Display Interval, exists to let you unload any
extraneous LAS data from memory. This interval may be changed any time.

To display or change display properties

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file.

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Display tab.

300
9.3 Log File(s) Tab
Things to know about this dialog

· You may add another TIFF/LAS file by clicking the Browse... button.
· If a well was created without a TIFF/LAS log file, (DB_? is in place of the log file name),
you can use this dialog to assign an image or LAS file.
· You can delete unwanted extra log files by clicking the Delete button next to the
TIFF/LAS file you would like to remove. (To delete a log file when it is the only one, go to
Home Ribbon > Delete-Data > Logs….)
· A log file cannot be deleted if you are in the Properties of that particular image/LAS.
· Wells can have multiple images and/or LAS files associated with them. That is, a single
well database entry may have several well images and/or LAS files associated with it.
This dialog may be used to view all files assigned to a particular well.
· A Log Type and Description may be added for each log.

To view / edit / add Log File(s)

· Right click on the open file.

o (This will also work for any file LAS or image)
· Select Properties….

301
 OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Log File(s) tab.

Wells with Multiple Data Sources

Sometimes two image files are logs that belong to the same well. If you visit the Data
Source tab for either of these well logs, you will see that both sources are listed, like the
example shown above. You will need to calibrate both images. However, any tops or faults will
belong to the well and will be a part of both documents simultaneously.

9.4 Deviation Tab

An element that can alter the way a well image/LAS file is displayed is directional information
from deviation surveys. This information allows wells to be more accurately displayed in Cross
Sections.
If a survey has been entered for a well, users may activate an option in the cross section
properties to display log images, LAS files, and stick view wells along the wellbore path.
The Deviation tab in the Well Properties dialog, shown below, allows you to enter, delete, or
simply view deviation information about a well. More information on cross section display
options can be found under Cross Section Properties.

To display or input deviation survey information

· Right click on the opened file.

302
 · Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Deviation tab.

9.5 Markers Tab

The Markers tab displays all event markers that have been placed in a well. This includes
depth, top, correlation and fault markers. You may view all imported and/or manually entered
markers for each well through this tab. The interpreters or authors of the manually entered
markers can also be viewed in this tab.
The interpreters or authors of the manually entered markers can also be viewed in this tab.
'Active' interpreter is selected by default. The display options are to see ALL, Active or a specific
single user. New interpreters are created when a user edits an imported top or another users',
opening another users' cross sections, or opening another users' AOI (area of interest).
(NOTE: To set interpreter preferences, go to File > Preferences. In the dialog, select Project.)

To display or input well information

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file.

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….

303
 · Select Markers tab.

Other options available under this tab

· View any subset of Top, Depth, Correlation and Fault markers. Check only the
markers you would like to view.
· Delete any marker from this table. Select markers you would like deleted from the well
and click Delete Selected.
· Edit Top, Correlation, and Fault depths. Click on the depth to edit and change.
· These are the only things that can be edited in this tab: Top, Correlation, and Fault
depths, along with the Dip Angle and Drilling Up fields. All other fields are static.

9.6 Production Display Tab

The Production Display tab is used to select the imported production test data to be posted
on your well log. The checkmarks signify the data being displayed on the well (if present). If
you don’t want a particular type of data posted, uncheck the appropriate box. Any additional
data may be posted later.
Perforation (PERF), Drill Stem Test (DST), Core, Well Cum, Shows and Initial Potential (IP)
may be manually entered. Or they can be imported from GeoGraphix WellBase V2,
GeoGraphix WellBase V3, GeoGraphix WellBase V4, IHS Energy Well Fixed 197, IHS
Energy Well Fixed 297, MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs, Excel, or Tabbed ASCII into the
database and posted on your wells/cross sections.
Important: Images must be calibrated in order for the data to be posted.

304
To display/post production test information

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file.

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Production Display tab.

9.7 Production Data Tab

The Production Data tab is used to add new test data and list or delete existing production test
data. To display each list, simply choose the desired type from the dropdown menu. If no data
exists for a certain production test data type, (NA) will be posted next to it. The checkmarks
signify the data being displayed on the well (if present).
Perforation (PERF), Drill Stem Test (DST), Core, Well Cum, Shows and Initial Potential (IP)
may be manually entered. Or they can be imported from GeoGraphix WellBase V2,
GeoGraphix WellBase V3, GeoGraphix WellBase V4, IHS Energy Well Fixed 197, IHS
Energy Well Fixed 297, MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs, Excel, or Tabbed ASCII into the
database and posted on your wells/cross sections.

To view, list, add, and/or delete production test data manually

305
 · Right click on the opened StTr40Sanchez.tif file.
· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Production Data tab.

9.8 Monthly Production Tab

The data for Monthly Production normally come from an IHS Energy Prod. Fixed 298 File.

To view the Monthly Production

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file. (Example Below.)

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Monthly Production tab.

306
9.9 Sand Display Tab
The Sand Display Tab is used to display Net Sands per surface. Sands (or counts) are
marked manually on logs. They can be automatically propagated to all other associated logs, or
it can be done manually if they need to be marked up differently. A single log can be set to the
primary count log.

To view, post, add and/or delete sand data manually

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file. (Example Below)

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Sand Display tab.

307
9.10 Log Text Tab
The Log Text tab has a breakdown of all Text Annotations added to a log (TIF/LAS log
documents). For more details about Text Annotations, see Section 13.4.3.
For each Text Annotation, all properties in the table can be edited from this tab. Text can also
be edited directly on the log by using the Text Annotation tool, in the Well / Logs Ribbon
(Annotations > Text Box):

To add/update Log Text

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file. (Example Below.)

· Select Properties….
OR
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Log Text tab.

308
9.11 LAS Display Tab
The LAS Display tab, as you may guess, is only meaningful to LAS files. In fact, this tab will
not appear if you have selected an image. This tab changes only the selected LAS file. (To
make project default changes to all LAS files, go to Well/Logs Ribbon > Well/Logs > LAS
Template.) There are a variety of elements that may be changed in an LAS file. They range
from grid spacing to track definition to curve appearance and placement.
Tracks can be added/removed, track widths can be changed, all characteristics of each curve
can be changed. The option to display curves with 'Invisible' line styles can be turned off or on
as well.

To edit the LAS Display

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file,

· Select Properties....
OR
· Choose Well/Log Properties... from the Main Program Menu Bar.
· Select 'LAS Display' tab.

309
The following defines each section on the LAS Display Tab, followed by a few suggested
changes to a file.

LAS Grids
· Depth Grid Interval/Style - Change the spacing of the Depth Grids (Heavy, Medium
& Light). Change the spacing of the Depth Grid Labels (Label).
· Grids - Uncheck to hide gridlines.
· Borders - Uncheck to hide border. Depth values and scale will remain visible.
· Color - Click button to change grid color.
· Thickness - Change gridline thickness.

LAS Tracks (first list)

· Add New - Add a track by clicking this button.
· Remove Selected - Delete a track by selecting a track - and then clicking this button.
· Type - For a given track, clicking on the track type will open a dropdown menu. This is
for changing the track scale type (Linear, Logarithmic, Hybrid, or Multi).
· Cycle/Divisions - Define the number of divisions or cycles.
· Left and Right - Edit the track offset values for the left and right sides of the track.
These values are with respect to the left-hand side of the log (in inches).
· Reset Positions - Clicking this button sets track offsets to a standard layout.

LAS Curves (second list)

· Track - Click to open a dropdown menu, for changing the track number where the
curve will appear.
· Line Style, Color and Thickness - Click to set.

310
 · Left and Right - Edit values for leftmost and rightmost scale values.
· Backup - Click to toggle between Yes and No. Determines whether to use backup
curves.
· Clip - Click to toggle between Yes and No. Determines whether to clip curves without
backups.

The Depth Track Properties can be accessed through the LAS Display tab, which is
described in the following section.

9.12 Depth Track Properties

For LAS files, the Depth Track Properties govern how the depth scale is formatted. Display
Log Scale Type will display the log scale type (with units) with every number on the depth
scale. (When unchecked, it appears only with the first number.) MD Track determines which
track to use for the Reference Depth Track, along with which track the depth scale appears to
the left of. Depths - Horizontal Display presents the numbers horizontally (instead of
vertically).
(NOTE: NeuraSection takes care of TVD scaling on its own.)

To set the Depth Track Properties

· On an LAS file, right click and select Properties….

· Click the LAS Display tab of the LAS Properties dialog. Click the Depth Track
Properties… button.
OR
· On the LAS file, right click on the depth scale and select Properties….
· If the LAS file has an MD or TVD/TVDSS curve track (not both), the following dialog
opens:

311
 · Log can be displayed in MD/TVD/TVDSS (measurement automatically chosen based on
other settings) by setting the Reference Depth Track. (See below for instructions to set
a Reference Depth Track.)

To set a Reference Depth Track

· Follow the instructions in the picture below:

To change Scale and Depth Font Display

· Go to Well / Logs Ribbon > LAS-Display > LAS Font Settings. This will open the
LAS Font dialog.
· To change font settings for Scale Text (i.e., the scales on top of the log), click the
Scale Text… button. These settings will apply to all opened LAS files.
o In the Font dialog, select the desired Font, Font Style, and Size. Click OK.
o Then click OK in the LAS Font dialog.
· To change font settings for Depth Track Text, click the Depth Track Text… button.

312
 Again, these settings will apply to all opened LAS files.
o In the Font dialog, select the desired Font, Font Style, Color, and Size.
o Click OK. Then click OK in the LAS Font dialog.

9.13 LAS Fills Tab

The LAS Fills tab below is used to change the display of your LAS Curve Fills. (This tab does
not appear for images.) Fills can be added/removed; track widths can be changed; and all
characteristics of each curve can be changed. The opacity can be set by clicking the opacity
then adjusting the Fill Transparency slider. In all, this tab offers a great deal of parameters and
features.

For LAS curves, you have the option of adding “fills”. Here are a few examples:

313
· You might want to fill the area between a curve and the left or right edge of the
track.

· You might want to fill the area between a curve and where it goes above or below
a chosen baseline.

· You might want to fill the area between a curve and where it goes above or below
another curve.

314
To add or edit fills, go to the LAS ribbon and click Properties. The Document Properties
dialog opens up. Go to the Curve Fill tab, shown below.

To Add Fills
· Click Add Fill(s).
· The Add Curve Fill(s) dialog opens up.
o Select which curve you want to add a fill for (can select more than one at once).
o By default, the fill will go the length of the log - but this is easily changed. To
customize the start and stop points, just modify the “Top” and “Bottom” values.

315
 o Once you’re done with the given settings, click OK.
· You will return to the Curve Fill tab. You should automatically see your new fill (if not,
click Apply).

To Fill Curve over Multiple Intervals

The same curve can have multiple fills over multiple intervals. These fills can even overlap (one
such example is shown under Layer Order). To accomplish these tasks, just repeatedly apply
the instructions under To Add Fills.

316
Adjusting Fills
For further customization, modify the values in the “Fills” table. To adjust a value, click on the
respective cell. From there, you may have to type in a value, interact with a pop-up dialog,
and/or interact with a dropdown menu.
· The Fill Style can be set to “Solid”, “Gradient”, “Discrete”, or “Multi Gradient”
(more details later).
· The color(s) can be customized, based on what Fill Style you picked.
· Opacity can be set.
· You can add a Lithology pattern on top of the color fill. You can even adjust the size
of the pattern.

· As mentioned in the earlier examples, the extent of the fill can be adjusted in various
ways.
o You can fill to the left edge or right edge.
§ To do this, set “Fill To” to “Edge”, and set “Direction” to “Right” or “Left”.
o You can fill to the left or right of a chosen baseline (“Value”).

317
 § To do this, set “Fill To” to “Value”. From there, type in your target value.

o You can fill the area between a curve and where it goes above or below another
curve.
§ To do this, set “Fill To” to “Curve”, and set “Direction” to “Left” or “Right”.
o Finally, you can re-adjust the depth coverage of the fill.
§ To do so, change the values of the “Start” and/or “Stop”.

Layer Order

To adjust layer order, right click on a row in the “Fills” list. Then select Move Front or Move
Back.

To Delete a Fill
To delete a fill, select it and click Clear Selected.

318
Other Features
The Document Properties dialog offers various other parameters and features, some of
which are highlighted in the figure below. Feel free to play around with the various features,
learning what each of them can do.

9.14 Remarks Tab

The Remarks tab allows comments to be entered for the well and stored in the database. This
is a good place to keep notes about the well logs you are using.

To view / edit / add log files

· Right click on an opened LAS or image file. Select Properties....

OR

319
· Choose Well / Logs Ribbon > Properties….
· Select Remarks tab.

320
10 Setting Top Interpreters
The interpreters are categorized by how the surfaces are added in a log (imported, added by the
current user, or added by other users). In addition, new interpreters are also created when a
user edits an imported top or another users', opening another users' cross sections, or opening
another users' AOI (area of interest).
In NeuraSection, users can set priority based on top interpreter. By default, the user's name,
known as the Alias (the “Active” interpreter), and “Import” (interpreter for imported tops) are
pre-selected. They are displayed first in the list, consecutively. They can be moved up/down.
For the same top, the top created by the interpreter first on the list will take precedence (i.e.,
"first priority").
(NOTE: For users who have both NeuraSection and Neuralog Desktop, the top interpreters’
priority and alias settings - and addition and/or deletion functions - are carried over on both
applications simultaneously.)

10.1 To Set Top Interpreters Priority

· In the Home ribbon, click Interpreters. The Select Interpreters dialog shows the list
of interpreters.

321
 · To make an Interpreter active, go to the list, and check the check box under the Active
column.
· Select/De-Select All (button) - Activate/De-activate all interpreters in the list.
· Up and Down buttons:
o - Every click on this button moves the selected interpreter(s) one step up in the list.
o - Every click on this button moves the selected interpreter(s) one step down in the
list.
· Click Apply. Then click OK. Only the tops of the selected interpreter(s) are displayed
during Log Correlation.

Other helpful information about Interpreters (NeuraSection)

· The Select Interpreters dialog can also be accessed by clicking the Interpreters
button in the Strat Bar during Log Correlation.
· The interpreters (authors) of the manually entered markers are listed in the Markers
Tab of the Well Properties dialog.
· To set interpreter alias in NeuraSection, go to the following section: Setting or Deleting
Interpreter Alias.

10.2 Setting or Deleting Interpreter Alias

322
In some cases where the user wants to work on another user's tops (perhaps tops that are
created from another application) the user can assign the other user's credentials as alias.
(NOTE: For users who have both NeuraSection and Neuralog Desktop, the top interpreters
priority and alias settings - and addition and/or deletion functions - are carried over on both
applications simultaneously.)

To set Interpreter Alias

· Go to File Preferences. The Default Settings dialog opens, as shown below.

· Under the 'Set Default Properties' options, select 'Application'.

· Under the 'Application Properties' options, click 'Interpreter Alias'.
· Click Select. The 'Set Alias' dialog opens, as shown below.

· Type in the alias name. Then click OK. A pop-up dialog confirms the alias name you
are using. Click OK.

323
 · In the Default Settings dialog, click Done.

· The interpreter is also displayed in the Interpreters dialog. It also appears in the Main
Application Window.

To delete Interpreter Alias

· Select File Preferences.

· In the Default Settings dialog, …
o Under the 'Set Default Properties' options, select 'Application'.
o Under the 'Application Properties' options, click 'Interpreter Alias'.
· Click Select. The Set Alias dialog opens.

324
· Check the Delete Alias check box.
· Then click OK.
· A pop-up dialog displays the active user's name - that is, the real username, rather
than an alias. (NOTE: Although the active user's name is not displayed in the ‘Default
Settings’ dialog, it is displayed in the top right corner of the Start Page [the page you
see when NeuraSection first opens].)

· Back in the Default Settings dialog, click Done.

325
11 Working with Well Logs
In the following subsections, you will learn to do the following tasks:
· Arrange well log windows
· Scroll and zoom well log windows
· Depth register log images
· Crop well logs
· Mark tops and bases
· Mark faults
· Manually add a deviation survey
· Manually add production test data
· Work with zone fills
· Create a proposed (or empty) well
· Delete wells
· Delete image or LAS files
· How to access log coverage

11.1 Arrange Well Log Windows

NeuraSection offers various features to make well correlation quick and easy. One is window
manipulation. The various window-manipulation options are explained below.

326
Document Window Handling

· Maximize: Click on the Maximize button to maximize the selected document window
or double click on the title bar.
· Maximize ALL: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select
Documents Maximize ALL.
· Minimize: Click on the Minimize button to minimize the selected document window.
· Minimize ALL: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select
Documents Minimize ALL.
· Auto Arrange: Aligns all non-minimized well logs side by side. Upon clicking it, the
option remains selected. While selected, opening more well logs will automatically
arrange them side by side with the others. Windows can be rearranged and still snap
side by side. (This option is automatically selected when opening a new log.)
· Correlation View: Go to the Well / Logs, Correlation, or Cross-Section ribbon.
Select Correlation Mode. For details about Correlation Mode, see Section 12.
· Tile Vertical: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select
Documents Vertical. This will fit all non-minimized windows into columns that
maximize the height of each window.
· Tile Horizontal: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select
Documents Horizontal. This will fit all non-minimized windows into columns that
maximize the width of each window.
· Cascade: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select Documents
Horizontal. This will stack the non-minimized windows in a way that lets you easily
thumb through them.

327
 · Extract / Integrate: Not available for well log windows. This option is for Project Maps,
Areas of Interest (AOIs), and Cross Sections. To use this feature, go to the respective
ribbon (Project Map, Area of Interest (AOI), or Cross-Section). Then select Extract
Window or Integrate Window. (The first option is also available by selecting
Documents > Extract.)
· More Windows: In any of the ribbons - except Correlation or Help - select
Documents More. Or go to any of the ribbons - except Help - and click
Documents (upper part of icon) (under Correlation, it exists only as a button). This
option will bring up the Open Documents dialog, where you can pick the target window
from a list.

11.2 Scroll and Zoom Well Log Windows

Once you're comfortable with arranging the well log windows - and once you have your wells
displaying properly - you can explore the various ways NeuraSection has to manipulate
documents. This section covers the basics of scrolling and zooming individual image windows.
Moreover, you can scroll and zoom all well logs together.

11.2.1 Scrolling / Zooming Individual Logs

Scrolling Individual Images

NeuraSection uses standard Windows scroll features with a few extensions. The additional
scroll features NeuraSection offers are:
· JUMPING TO A PARTICULAR LOCATION: Click in the scroll bar trough with the

328
 middle mouse button (i.e., between the scroll arrows). The window will jump to that
image location.
· SPACE BAR SCROLLING: Inside the active image, move the cursor to a target
location. Then press the spacebar. The image will be scrolled to the cursor location.
That is, the original cursor location moves to the center of the screen.
· SCROLL TO DEPTH: Right click on a log document and select Scroll Logs To....

Zooming Individual Images

NeuraSection has certain basic zoom features under every ribbon except Help. In addition,
various zoom features are accessible through right click menus on any document window.
Finally, just above the ribbon, far to the right, is a box to input percent zoom.

After using the "Zoom rectangle" option (the Zoom button), it is easy to return to the zoom
you had just before. Just right click inside the document and select Zoom > Back.

11.2.2 Scrolling / Zooming ALL Logs Together

To assist in correlation, NeuraSection allows you to scroll and zoom all open calibrated well
logs together. NeuraSection treats image and LAS files in the same way for all the features
described below.

Scrolling All Well Logs

Scroll / Zoom features to assist in correlation:

· Scroll-To > Scroll All To Depth - Scrolls all logs to a selected depth interval (TVDSS).
(If the depth is beyond the the log, the program will scroll as far as it can.)

329
 · Scroll-To > Lock Scroll - Scrolls all logs together (at the same rate). To use this
feature, you must scroll with the scroll bar - not the scroll wheel.
· Auto Arrange - Aligns all non-minimized well logs side by side. Upon clicking it, the
option remains selected.
o While selected, opening more well logs will automatically arrange them side by side
with the others. Windows can be rearranged and still snap side by side.
o (This option is automatically selected when opening a new log.)
· Zoom All - Zooms all well log documents to the zoom factor of the selected document.

NOTES:
1. True Vertical Depth (TVDSS), derived from Deviation Survey and Kelly Bushing, is
used with Scroll All To Depth. Therefore, logs may not seem aligned to the same
depth when using this feature.
2. Lock Scroll works with the Next Marker command, scrolling all logs to the next
marker (e.g., formation top). (Only those with the marker get scrolled.)

Scroll Logs To…

For quickly scrolling to any measured, true vertical depth, surface, fault or correlation point on a
well log.
· Right click on a well log document
· Select Scroll Logs To..., or select Well / Logs ribbon > Scroll-To (upper part of
icon).

· The Scroll To panel opens. You can scroll to a place on a single log. Or check the
Scroll All Logs check box. (For more information, also see Scroll To Panel.)

330
11.3 Depth Register Log Images
Depth registration of log images is simple. The only calibration rule is that you should place
Depth Markers near the beginning and end of the log track because only the part of the log
image within calibration markers will display in a cross section. To create a cross section, make
sure all the wells you wish to include are open and properly depth registered.

Depth Calibration Tips

· At least 2 depth markers must be entered.

· By default, depth markers are typed in measured depth (MD). However, the log may be
defined as a TVD Log.
· Any number of additional depth markers may be entered.
· First and last markers should be placed at the top and bottom of the well track.
· Only the image within the topmost and bottommost depth markers will be displayed in a
cross section.

331
 · Depth markers may be added at any time.
· Depth markers may be added in any depth order.
· Depth markers may be moved up/down by selecting them and dragging them up/down.
To select, place the cursor directly over the number. The marker will become
highlighted in the image.
· Depth values, color and font can be edited through the Depth Properties dialog.
· To open the Depth Properties dialog, right click while a depth marker is selected and
select Properties....
· LAS files automatically contain two depth markers.

11.3.1 Calibrating Image Files

To calibrate a MD well log image (Measured Depth Log):

· First, select an open log image associated with a well in the database.
· Scroll the log image to a visible depth near the beginning of the log track.
· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Depth (shown below), or use the hot key Alt+D.

· Click in the image at the first target depth location. The Depth Properties dialog will
appear.

332
· Type in the depth.
· Change the font and color of the depth marker, if desired.
· Click OK.

· Scroll the log image to the second target depth location, and repeat the above steps.
· Afterward, you will see the effects of image normalization. In addition, any imported
tops and faults will appear.

333
 · Additional depth markers can be added if the log needs further calibration.

To calibrate a TVD well log image (True Vertical Depth Log):

The procedures will be the same as outlined above for measured depth logs EXCEPT the TVD
Log checkbox needs to be checked on one of the depth markers (which automatically applies
it to all markers) to indicate it is a true vertical depth log.
(NOTE: When a log is tagged as TVD, the deviation survey [if present] will be ignored. It will be
used only to display the wellbore deviations in the cross section.)
(NOTE: After an image file is calibrated, depth Track automatically displays with TVDSS
depths.)

11.3.2 Depth Marker Properties

Depth marker properties are set in this dialog. They may be edited at any time.

334
11.3.3 Calibrating Logs with Multiple Runs

Sometimes a well log has multiple runs within a single image file (essentially, one log file
coming after another - except they’re all in the same file). These runs may be repeats, in
which case only one can be used. Or they may cover different depth ranges.

To calibrate a log with multiple (non-repeated) runs

· Select a well log document window.

· Add depth markers as you would normally, marking the first run interval.
o NOTE: The last marker in the first interval should be marked where the log runs are
going to be 'spliced' together.

335
 · On the second interval, add a depth marker where you want the two intervals spliced.
NOTE: Any image in between the duplicate depth markers will be ignored when placed
in a cross section.

· Add final depth markers in the lower interval.

When you calibrate a log in this way, any image space between the two depth markers
is ignored. Note that you could also use this technique to eliminate severe paper
stretch.

11.3.4 Calibration of LAS Files

Because LAS files contain depth information, they are automatically calibrated upon import.

336
That is, two depth markers are created, one at the top and one at the bottom of the track.
Because these are vector files and there is no “image stretch” to worry about, no additional
depth markers are needed.

11.4 Crop Well Logs

Often, scanned log images will have large areas of white space on either side of the log track.
This white space is not desirable in the cross section because it affects the connection of tops
and their zone fills. To account for this, NeuraSection allows you to crop the edges of the log
images, thus removing the white space for the cross section view.

11.4.1 To Crop a Log Image

Remember - cropping a log image does not change the view in the original document window.
It affects only cross section display.
· Select a calibrated log image.
· Scroll to first depth marker placed on the image.
o (TIP: Turn on the Depth Marker Tool [Well / Logs ribbon, select Depth], and hit

337
 the N key on your keyboard to scroll to each depth marker on your log.)
· With the Depth Marker Tool on, drag the cursor over the right edge of the selected
depth marker. You will see the edge turn into a red vertical bar (Depth Handle).
· Drag the depth handle to the left to move the depth marker edge.
· Adjust the other depth handles on each side of the image in the same way.
OR
· Hold down the Shift key on your keyboard while moving a depth handle to align all
depth handles on a side simultaneously.

NOTE: Moving the edge of the depth marker will cause the image to be cropped in the cross
section. However, both edges may be cropped. Note that these changes do not affect the well
log documents themselves. Only the images that appear in the Cross Section presentation are
affected.

11.4.2 Logs with Multiple Runs

If you are cropping logs with multiple runs, take special care to move each depth handle to align
with its track edge. Do not use the SHIFT key in this case because it aligns all markers, but
adjust each marker individually. If done correctly, when the log is then placed in a cross
section, it will appear as a single smooth log run.

Example:
· The log on the left is a single image with 2 runs spliced together.
o NOTE: There are two (2) depth markers set at 8500 ft.
· The cross section on the right shows how that same log displays in a cross section
spliced together and aligned.
o Notice that the two runs are not aligned quite properly. This is because the depth
handles are not in the proper spots.

338
11.4.3 Skewed Logs

If log images are skewed, the images can be straightened by adjusting the depth handles.
Simply place adequate depth markers throughout the log image and adjust the edges of the
markers to follow the edge of the track. When the well log images are placed in the cross
section, they will appear straightened.

11.4.4 Cropping Log Tracks

Depth marker handles may be used to display a particular track from a log image in a cross
section.
To do so, adjust the depth handles to enclose only the needed track. When the well log images
are placed in the cross section, only the image within the marker edges will appear.

11.4.5 Cropping LAS Files

LAS files can have white border space controlled through the LAS Display panel by setting the
Left and Right track positions. They do not have the problem of large amounts of unwanted
white space (left and right borders) that many images do, and there is usually no need to crop
them for this purpose. You may fine-tune the left and right edges, however, by dragging the
depth handles. In addition, you might crop an LAS file if you just want a particular track to
appear in your cross section.

339
11.5 Marking Tops and Bases

Tops and bases can be picked and/or adjusted manually by clicking directly on a calibrated well
log image or LAS document. They can also be adjusted directly on the cross section document.
Before marking tops and bases, it is recommended you build your (initial) surface list in the
Strat Panel (Project Level Surface Table). Or if another project already has it set up, you can
export the Strat Panel from one project to another.
(NOTE: Although you can create a cross section without marking tops beforehand, we
recommend you do as much work in advance to prepare the wells, to minimize the amount of
editing to be done after the cross section is created. Wells [and logs] can, however, be easily
edited, and new wells [and logs] added, even after the cross section is created.)

11.5.1 Mark Tops Manually

· Select a calibrated well log.

· Select the Top marker tool (Well / Logs ribbon > Tops [upper button]).
o (NOTE: Users can decide whether the Top Marker tool automatically turns on
when activating Correlation Mode. Go to File Preferences.)
· Click directly on the image or LAS file. A top marker will be created.

340
· By default, a top will be automatically named based on the order in the Strat Bar. (To
manually assign a name, see instructions further below.)

341
o The first top you add will be automatically given the first name in the list.
o The next top down will receive the second name, and so forth.

342
 o If you click between two existing tops, you will have to add a new top (the Top
Properties dialog will automatically open).
o For example, the Strat Bar may have three tops with the following names: “B”, “2”,
and “A” - in that order.
§ Inside a given log, the first time you click, the top name will be “B”.
§ The second time you click - if you click below “B”, then the top name will be “2”.
§ Now, if you click between “B” and “2”, then the Top Properties dialog will open,
for you to name a new top. (The default name is “UnNamed Top 1”.) The new top
will be added to the Strat Bar.
§ If you click below “2”, then the top name will be “A”.
§ Suppose a log has “B” and “A” - but no “2”. In that case, clicking between “B”
and “A” creates a top named “2”.
· To manually assign a name, do the following: Before you click on the log, select the
target name in the Strat Bar. Once you click, the top will be given your chosen name.
(To add a new top name, you must add it to the Strat Bar.)

343
 · If you would like to change properties of a selected top, right click on the top marker and
select Properties.... The Top Properties dialog opens up.
o (NOTE: When creating a new top [i.e., one not yet in the Strat Panel], the Top
Properties dialog appears automatically.)

11.5.2 Mark Bases Manually

344
· Directly on Log File - Top Properties Panel
o Select the Top marker tool (Well / Logs ribbon > Tops).
o Highlight desired top.
o Right click and select Properties....
o Type Base depth value.

· Directly on Log File - Well Properties Panel - Markers Tab

o Right click on log and select Properties....

345
 o In the Log Properties dialog, select the Markers tab.
o In the table, double click on the appropriate cell.

o In the cell, type the Base depth value.

· Directly on Log File - Marking on log

o Select the Top marker tool (Well / Logs ribbon > Tops).
o Drag the cursor to the center of the top. Over the center of the top, you should see
the "base cursor":

o Drag marker to the base position on the log. (NOTE: The word “(base)” will
appear on the new marker. All properties are driven by the Top marker itself.)

346
11.5.3 Tips for Picking/Editing Tops

· The top pick auto-naming order is driven from the Strat Panel (Project Level Surface
Table) (Well / Logs ribbon > Master Strat).
· Top order, name, and color defaults can be edited in the Strat Panel.
· Top names and font can be edited by accessing the Top Properties dialog shown
above.
· Any number of tops can be selected in any order.
· Tops can be added any time on a calibrated log - through the well document or the
cross section.
· Tops can be moved up/down - by dragging within the well document or the cross
section view window.
· The Measured Depth of the top may be manually set by typing a depth in the Top
Properties dialog - or the Markers tab in the Well Properties dialog.
· Flatten tops stratigraphically across all open well log documents to check marker
placement:
o Turn on the Top Marker (Well / Logs ribbon > Tops) and Lock Scroll (… >
Scroll-To > Lock Scroll) tools at the same time. Inside one of the well
documents, press the 'N' key.
o Each time 'N' is pushed, it will scroll to the next surface and flatten all other
wells on the same.

11.5.4 Top Properties

Top marker properties are set in this dialog. They may be edited at any time.

Top Marker Tab

347
 1) Top Name - Select an existing surface from the dropdown menu, or type a new surface
name (which will be added to the current Strat Panel).
2) Measured Depth - Measured depth calculated from the calibrated log.
3) Base - Set the depth of the base.
4) Units - Set the units for the depth.
5) Post with ALL Tops - If MD and/or TVDSS is checked, the measured depth and/or
true vertical depth subsea values will display below the top marker. The font will always
be half the size of the top label and display in black.
6) Lock to Depth - With this option activated, tops will move based on both changes in
the depth value and changes in the depth calibration. This option is checked by default.
7) Show Dialog on New - With this option activated, this dialog box will pop up whenever
a new top is added. If it is turned off, it will appear only if the Strat Panel is not populated
- or the program determines a new surface needs to be created.
8) Line Type - Set the line type.
9) Line Thickness - Set the line thickness of a single surface or all top markers in your
project.
10) Font Properties - Basic font properties can be set here, as well as, turning all the
top/fault labels to the color black and/or setting the background of all the labels to
opaque.
11) Draw Below the Line - Option to draw name of top below the line.
12) Show Base Text - Option to show the name of the base.

Formatting Top Picks from the Top Properties Panel

· Change color and font.
348
 · Set ALL labels to display with an opaque background.
· Set ALL labels to display with a black font.
· Display MD and/or TVD below the Top Line.
NOTE: For Generic Correlation Point (GCP), also see Log Correlation.

Zone Fill Tab

For presentation purposes, you may fill the zones within your well logs. These zones will then
become part of your final cross section presentation. NeuraSection provides a very simple
mechanism for filling zones and provides several tools to customize these fills.

To Fill/Edit Individual Zones

· Select Well / Logs ribbon > Tops.
· Select a top marker on any well log by hovering the cursor over it. The marker gets
highlighted.
· Right click and bring up the Top Properties dialog.
· Select the Zone Fill tab, shown above.
· Select the top to fill down to (Fill Dimension).
· Click OK.

To Fill All Zones

· Right click in any well log and select Fill All Adjacent Tops, or right click in a cross
section and select Fill > Well Log Zones.
o This will cause all zones, defined by default as areas between top markers, to be
filled with preset colors displayed in the Strat Panel.

349
11.5.5 Strat Panel (Project Level Surface Table)

Project Level Surface Table (Strat Panel)

The Project Level Surface Table (Strat Panel) holds the Project Level Surface Names
and Colors. It is automatically populated during the import of tops, or it may be populated
manually. If the table was populated during import, you may need to adjust the order.
NeuraSection makes its best guess based on top depths in all wells imported.
The Project Level Surface Table may also be used to easily change top colors, profiles, and
zones for all wells in the project (with the selected surface) at any time. It should be considered
the “master surface list”. If anything appears to be out of order, this is the first place to look.
In addition, all panels and right click options displaying surface/tops are called from
this surface table.

To Edit/View Strat Panel

· Select Well / Logs Ribbon > Master Strat…. This opens the Project Level Surface
Table dialog.

1) Active Surfaces - Lists all defined active surfaces in the project. An inactive surface
can be selected to be moved to Inactive Surfaces or vice versa. Active surfaces are
displayed in the Tops Properties, Cross Section Properties, and AOI Map views.
2) Color - Click on color square to change the color of the selected surface.
3) Move Surface Up/Down - Select a surface in the grid/panel and click the up/down

350
 arrows.
4) Delete Selected - Deletes/removes the surface selected - and all tops with the same
name in the project.
5) Add New - Opens a panel to add a new surface.
6) Show/Hide Inactive List - Toggles showing/hiding list of inactive surfaces. When the
button says “Show”, the number of surfaces in the list is displayed in parentheses.
7) Remove ALL Inactive - Moves ALL inactive surfaces back to Inactive Surface list.
8) Inactive Surfaces - Lists all defined inactive surfaces in the project. An inactive
surface can be selected to be moved to Active Surfaces or vice versa. “Inactive”
means it will not appear in the Strat Bar.
· Inactive tops will still appear in the logs - wherever such tops were previously
added to the logs. “Inactive” affects only the Strat Bar - the list of tops that are
automatically selected when adding tops to wells.
9) Restore ALL Inactive - Moves ALL surfaces back to Active Surface list.
10) Find Name/Agecode/Mnemonic/Description Dialog - Right click on one of these
four columns: Age Code, Mnem, Surface Name, Description). The respective dialog
will pop up. This option allows searching for a log by typing in the name, or part of the
name.
11) Edit Selected - Click to edit Surface Name, Age Code and Description of the selected
surface.
12) Strat Set - Users can create (add/remove) custom strat sets, to refine the correlation
workflow. 'Master' is the default strat set and cannot be removed. A copy of the
'Master' or custom strat sets can be created.
· When Strat Administration is OFF, the user cannot delete others' tops. To turn
ON/OFF Strat Administration, do the following:
o Go to File Preferences.
o Under Set Default Properties, select Project.
o Then select Strat Admin (ON)/(OFF) under Project Properties. Selecting will
toggle between ON and OFF.

11.5.6 Delete Tops (from the database)

· In the Home ribbon, select Delete-Data Tops….

351
· First, the Select Interpreter dialog will open. Select an interpreter from the dropdown
menu and click OK. (The number in parentheses is the number of tops picked - added
up from the number of logs [not wells] sharing each top.)

· The Delete Tops panel opens up. Select the tops to delete, and click Delete.
o If you want to select another interpreter, just use the dropdown menu.

352
 · Click OK.

11.6 Marking Faults

Faults are marked in well logs in a similar manner to how top markers are placed. The following
instructions explain how to mark faults in a well log. (NOTE: Faults may also be added and/or
353
edited from the Cross Section window.)

11.6.1 Marking Faults

· Choose a calibrated well log.

· Select Well / Logs ribbon > Faults.
· Click in the log at the fault location.
· Enter fault name and properties in the Fault Properties dialog (see next section).

· Click OK when done.

11.6.2 Fault Marker Properties

Fault marker properties are set in this dialog. They may be edited at any time.

354
 1) Fault Name - Type fault name.
2) Measured Depth - Measured depth calculated from the calibrated log. (NOTE:
Changing this value will move the fault marker to the new depth location.)
3) Lock to Depth - With this option activated, tops will move based on both changes in the
depth value and changes in the depth calibration. This option is checked by default.
4) Fault Type - Select fault type.
5) Missing Section Interval - Type missing section length. The missing section will
display as a 'broken' log (image, LAS, and/or stick view) in a cross section when it is
displayed in stratigraphic mode.
6) Estimated Datum Top Offset (ft/m) - Type offset to enable accurate 'flattening' of a
selected surface in stratigraphic mode.
7) Post with ALL Faults
·If Missing Section is checked, the value will display on the same line as the fault
name. The font will be the same size and color as the name.
· If MD and/or TVDSS is checked, the measured depth and/or true vertical depth
subsea values will display below the top marker. The font will always be half the size
of the top label and display in black.
8) Line Thickness - Set line thickness to apply to one or all faults in a project.
9) Font Properties - Basic font properties can be set here.

11.6.3 Delete Faults (from the database)

· Go to the Home ribbon, select Delete-Data Faults....

355
· The Select Interpreter dialog opens up. Select an interpreter from the dropdown
menu and click OK. (The number in parentheses is the number of faults in the project.
Each fault is counted once, regardless of how many logs it appears in.)

· Select fault(s) to delete. Then click Delete.

· Click Yes to confirm.

356
11.7 Manually Add/Edit Deviation Survey
Deviation information may be entered manually if it is not available through import.
· Right click on an opened LAS or image file. Select Properties....
OR
· Well / Logs ribbon Properties....
· Select the Deviation tab.

Typing
1. Click in the Measured Depth box on Row #1.
2. Enter the data for that box.
3. Hit the tab key to move to the next box, True Vertical Depth, and enter the next value.
4. Continue entering data in this manner. (NOTE: When one row of data is complete, you
are automatically moved to the next row.)

357
Copy/Paste
(NOTE: Data must be from Excel or in space/tab delimited format, and they must be in the
same columnar order as in the Deviation tab: MD, TVD, N-S Drift, and E-W Drift.)
1. Open file with directional survey data.
2. Highlight directional survey data - excluding Sample #.
3. Copy data (Ctrl + C).
4. Go back to the Deviation tab and click the Paste Survey button.

358
To Delete Line(s) of Data
Survey information may be deleted by selecting one or more rows from the grid and clicking the
Delete Selected button. The whole survey can be deleted at once with the Delete Survey
button.
1. Select line(s) of data to delete.
2. Click the Delete Selected or Delete Survey button.

To Unload/Disable a Survey
Survey information may be unloaded/disabled for a single working session. (NOTE: The survey
will be automatically re-loaded when the well is closed and reopened.)
1. Click the Unload Survey button.
2. Click the Apply or OK.

359
11.8 Manually Add/Edit Production Test Data
In this subsection, you will learn a variety of tools that let you easily add production test data by
hand, including the following:
· Perforations (PERF)
· PERF properties
· PERF list
· Drill stem tests (DST)
· DST properties
· DST list
· Initial Potential (IP)
· IP properties
· IP list
· Core data (CORE)
· CORE properties
· CORE list
· Shows (SHOW)
· SHOW properties
· SHOW list

360
In addition, you will learn how to use the Quick Production Test accelerator.

11.8.1 Quick Production Test Accelerator

Adding production test data manually can be done quickly with the Quick Production
Test Accelerator. It will copy the properties of the previous symbol (of the selected type) with
a new depth interval.
To Use:
· Log must be calibrated.
· The well must have at least one production test data symbol of the target type. For
example, you must have a PERF symbol for the Quick Production Test Accelerator to
produce more PERF symbols. Here are the following choices:
o Perforations (PERF)
o Drill Stem Tests (DST)
o Initial Potential (IP)
o Core Data (CORE)
· Once these conditions are satisfied, you're ready to go. To open the Quick Production
Test Accelerator, just press Ctrl+Alt+P.
· The Quick Production Test Data dialog will open up. Select the symbol type you want
to produce, and then set the depth interval. Finally, click "Create".

11.8.2 Perforations (PERF)

To add a PERF manually to a well log

NOTE: PERFS are added to images and LAS files in the same way.
· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Perforations.

361
 · Press the mouse where you want to begin the PERF.
· Drag downward to size the PERF.
· Release the mouse when the PERF is the correct size.
· Resize the PERF, if needed, by selecting a perforation handle and dragging a side out.
· Move the PERF by grabbing it with the mouse and dragging it.

Post imported perforation data

· Right click on the log and select Properties....

· Select the Production Display Tab.
· Click Post for imported PERFs to appear. (Symbols will be posted on the log once it is
calibrated.)

362
11.8.3 PERF Properties

Each perforation interval has its own set of properties. These properties are accessed through
the three tabs in the Perforation Properties dialog.
NOTE: Perforations are added to images and LAS files in the same manner.

To set/change PERF properties

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Perforations.

· Highlight the target PERF.
· Right click and select Properties....

Properties Tab

Interval and symbol appearance (color) may be changed. There are also options to lock to
depth and to make the text always visible on the cross section and well document. The
following PERF types are honored:
· Open
· Squeezed
· Active
· Inactive
363
 · Injection
· Plugged
· Proposed

Grid Tab

Contains a listing of available information for the PERF that can be chosen for display by
checking desired entries and clicking the Update Text button.

Text Tab

364
Text shows information selected from the Grid Tab. At this point, users may format/change
the text as necessary or desired. The text will be displayed on the well log and cross section.
This information can be edited any time.
In addition to the selected information from the Grid Tab, users may enter comments in this
tab as well.

11.8.4 PERF List

In the Well Properties dialog, the Production Data Tab offers a convenient way to edit and
delete PERFs. In the dropdown menu, select Perforations.
· Each PERF interval is named after the first top above the starting depth. If there’s no
top above, Unknown will display in place of the top name.

365
11.8.5 Drill Stem Tests (DST)

To add a DST manually to a well log

NOTE: DSTs are added to images and LAS files in the same way.
· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Drill Stem Test.

· Hold the mouse where you want to begin the DST.

· Drag downward to size the DST.
· Release the mouse when the DST is the correct size.
· Resize the DST, if needed, by selecting a DST handle and dragging a side out. Move
the DST by grabbing it with the mouse and dragging it.

366
Post imported DST data

· Right click on the log and select Properties....

· Select the Production Display Tab.
· Click Post for imported DSTs to appear. (Symbols will be posted on the log once it is
calibrated.)

11.8.6 DST Properties

Each DST interval has its own set of properties. These properties are accessed
through the three tabs in the DST Properties dialog.
(NOTE: DSTs are added to images and LAS files in the same manner.)

To set/change DST properties

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Drill Stem Test.
· Highlight the target DST interval.
· Right click and select Properties....

Properties Tab

Interval and symbol appearance (color) may be changed, as well as options to lock to depth
and make the text always visible.

367
Grid Tab

Contains a listing of available information for the DST that can be chosen for display by
checking desired entries and clicking the Update Text button.

368
Text Tab

Text shows selected information from the Grid Tab. At this point, users may format/change
the text as necessary, which will be displayed on the well log and cross section. This
information may be edited at any time.
In addition to the selected information from the Grid Tab, users may enter comments in this
tab as well.

369
11.8.7 DST List

In the Log Properties dialog, the Production Data Tab offers a convenient way to edit and
delete DSTs. In the dropdown menu, select Drill Stem Tests.
· Each DST interval is named after the first top above the starting depth. If there’s no top
above, Unknown will display in place of the top name.

370
11.8.8 Initial Potential (IP)

To add an IP manually to a well log

· In the Well/Logs ribbon, select Production > Initial Potential.

371
 · Hold down the mouse where you want to begin the IP.
· Drag downward to draw the IP.
· Release the mouse when the IP is the correct size.
· Resize the IP, if needed, by selecting an IP handle and dragging it. Move the IP by
grabbing it with the mouse and dragging it.

Post imported IP data

· Right click on the log and select Properties....
· Select the Production Display Tab.
· Click Post for imported IP to appear. (Symbols will be posted on the log once it is
calibrated.)
· NOTE: IPs are added to images and LAS files in the same way.

11.8.9 IP Properties

Each IP interval has its own set of properties. These properties can be accessed through the
three tabs in the Initial Potential dialog. (Note: IPs are added to images and LAS files in the
same manner.)

To set/change IP properties

· In the Well/Logs ribbon, select Production > Initial Potential.

· Highlight the target IP interval.
· Right click and select Properties....

Properties Tab
Interval and symbol appearance (color) may be changed - as well as options to lock to depth
and make the text always visible.

372
Grid Tab
Contains a listing of available information for the IP that can be chosen for display, by checking
desired entries and clicking the Update Text button.

373
Text Tab
Text shows selected information from the Grid Tab. At this point, users may format/change
the text as necessary, which will be displayed on the well log and cross section. This
information may be edited at any time.
In addition to the selected information from the Grid Tab, users may enter comments in this
tab as well.

374
11.8.10 IP List

In the Log Properties dialog, the Production Data Tab offers a convenient way to edit and
delete IPs. In the dropdown menu, select Initial Potentials.
· Each IP interval is named after the first top above the starting depth. If there’s no top
above, Unknown will display in place of the top name.

375
11.8.11 Core Data (CORE)

To add a CORE manually to a well log

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Core.

376
 · Hold down the mouse where you want to begin the CORE.
· Drag downward to draw the CORE.
· Release the mouse when the CORE is the correct size.
· Resize, if needed, by selecting a CORE handle and dragging a side out. Move the
CORE by grabbing it with the mouse and dragging it.

Post imported CORE data

· Right click on the log and select Properties....

· Select the Production Display Tab.
· Click Post for imported COREs to appear. (Symbols will be posted on the log once it is
calibrated.)
· NOTE: COREs are added to images and LAS files in the same way.

11.8.12 CORE Properties

Each CORE interval has its own set of properties. These properties can be accessed through
the three tabs in the Core Properties dialog. (NOTE: COREs are added to images and LAS
files in the same manner.)

To set/change CORE properties

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Core.

377
 · Highlight the target CORE interval.
· Right click and select Properties....

Properties Tab
Interval and symbol appearance (color) may be changed, as well as options to lock to depth
and make the text always visible.

Grid Tab
Contains a listing of available information for the CORE that can be chosen for display.

378
Check-mark the desired entries and click the Update Text button.

Text Tab
Shows selected information from the Grid Tab. At this point, users may format/change the
text as necessary. The text will be displayed on the well log and cross section. This
information may be edited at any time.
In addition to the selected information from the Grid Tab, users may enter comments in this
tab as well.

379
11.8.13 CORE List

In the Log Properties dialog, the Production Data Tab offers a convenient way to edit and
delete COREs. In the dropdown menu, select Well Cores.
· Each CORE interval is named after the first top above the starting depth. If there’s no
top above, Unknown will display in place of the top name.

380
11.8.14 Shows (SHOW)

To add a SHOW manually to a well log

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Oil / Gas Shows.

381
 · Hold the mouse where you want to begin the SHOW.
· Drag downward to size the SHOW.
· Release the mouse when the SHOW is the correct size.
· Resize the SHOW, if needed, by selecting a SHOW handle and dragging a side out.
Move the SHOW by dragging it.

Post imported SHOW data

· Right click on the log and select Properties....

· Select the Production Display Tab.
· Click Post for imported SHOWs to appear. (Symbols will be posted on the log once it
is calibrated.)
NOTE: SHOWs are added to images and LAS files in the same way.

11.8.15 SHOW Properties

Each SHOW interval has its own set of properties. These properties can be accessed through
the three tabs in the Show Properties dialog. (NOTE: SHOWs are added to images and LAS
files in the same manner.)

To set/change SHOW properties

· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Production > Oil / Gas Shows.

382
 · Highlight the target SHOW interval.
· Right click and select Properties....

Properties Tab
Interval and symbol appearance (color) may be changed - as well as options to lock to depth
and make the text always visible.

Grid Tab
Contains a listing of available information for the SHOW that can be chosen - for display by

383
check-marking desired entries and clicking the Update Text button.

Text Tab
Shows selected information from the Grid Tab. At this point, users may format/change the
text as necessary. The text will be displayed on the well log and cross section. This
information may be edited any time.
In addition to the selected information from the Grid Tab, users may enter comments in this
tab as well.

384
11.8.16 SHOW List

In the Log Properties dialog, the Production Data Tab offers a convenient way to edit and
delete COREs. In the dropdown menu, select Well Cores.
· Each CORE interval is named after the first top above the starting depth. If there’s no
top above, Unknown will display in place of the top name.

385
11.9 Zone Fills
For presentation purposes, you may fill the zones within your well logs. These zones will then
become part of your final Cross Section presentation. NeuraSection provides a very simple
mechanism for filling zones, and it provides several tools to customize these fills.
Again, Zone Fills appear in both Cross Sections and Well Logs. Below is a figure showing
what they look like, in both such documents:

Zone Fills in Cross Sections and Well Logs

386
Fill All Zones
· Right click in any Well Log and select Fill All Adjacent Tops.
OR
· Right click in a Cross Section and select Fill Well Log Zones.
· This will cause all zones, defined by default as areas between top markers (e.g., figure
above), to be filled with preset colors displayed in the Strat Panel.

Fill/Edit Individual Zones

387
 · Select Well / Logs ribbon > Tops.
· On any Well Log or Cross Section, select a top marker by hovering the cursor over it.
You will see the marker become highlighted.
· Right click and select Properties….
· Select the Zone Fill tab, shown above.
· Under Fill Dimension, Select the top to fill down to.
· Click OK.

11.10 Create a Proposed (or Empty) Well

An empty well is one with no data assigned to it. It may be used as a proposed well location, as
well as a placeholder document, until information can be added.
· Choose File New Well.
OR
· Go to Well / Logs ribbon Well/Logs Open Wells....
o If a well filter has been previously applied, then the Filter Wells dialog will open.
Select the check boxes you want (if any). Then click OK.
o The Well Choice and Setup panel opens up. Click ADD NEW WELL.
· In the dialog box, fill out required well information. Then click OK.
· An empty document is created within NeuraSection.
· You can now assign a log file, such as an image or LAS file. You can also enter or
assign well header and other well information.

388
11.11 Delete Well(s)
· Select Home ribbon Delete-Data Wells….

389
 · Click OK.

If a well to be deleted is being used in a cross section, the dialog warns you about this:

11.12 Delete Image/LAS

· Select Home ribbon Delete-Data Logs….

390
 · Click OK.

See also:
Log File(s) Tab

11.13 Log Coverage

Log Coverage displays information about log intervals of log images and LAS files. (NOTE:
Only calibrated logs can be displayed.) The well name and number are its standard displays.

To access Log Coverage

391
Method 1 (see figure below):
· Go to main menu, select Well / Logs Log Coverage.
· The Log Coverage panel opens.
· To add wells to display, click the Select Wells button.
· If you previously applied a filter, the Filter Wells dialog will open. Make your settings
and click OK.
· Select well(s) in the Well Choice and Setup panel. Then click OK.
· The Log Coverage panel displays the intervals for the selected well(s).

392
Method 2 (see figure below):
· Select Well / Logs ribbon Well/Logs Open Wells... (or File > Open >
Wells / Logs...).
OR
· Select File New Well.
· If a well filter has been previously applied, then the Filter Wells dialog will open.
Select the check boxes you want (if any). Then click OK.
· The Well Choice and Setup panel opens up.

393
 · Right click on a well, and select Log Coverage....
· Follow remaining instructions above to add more wells to display (if desired).

See also:
Log File(s) Tab

394
12 Log Correlation
Log Correlation is an important task in making a cross section presentation. When in
Correlation Mode, the single wells are sorted as they appear in the cross section.

12.1 Correlation Mode

· Select Well / Logs ribbon Correlation Mode.

· When the Auto Start option on both the Select Logs to Correlate and Scroll To
panels are checked, these panels open when Correlation is activated.
· Selecting Correlation Mode will automatically re-zoom the images.

12.2 Tie Log

395
The Log Correlation mode has the ability to set a Tie Log. The tie log has the following
characteristics:
· When the tie log is set, the selected log is displayed or moved to the far left (if not
already on the left). The unselected logs are pushed to the right of the tie log.
· To set the tie log, click Correlation Ribbon > Set Tie Log. In the Select Tie Log
dialog, select the target log from the list. Alternatively, right click inside the target log
and select Tie Log.

· Only ONE tie log can be selected at a time.

396
12.3 Select Logs to Correlate Panel
The Select Logs to Correlate panel can be accessed in two different ways:
· When the Auto Start option on the Select Logs to Correlate panel is checked, this
panel opens when Correlation Mode is activated (Correlation Ribbon > Correlation
Mode).
· Or select Correlation Ribbon > Select Logs to Correlate. (NOTE: This option is
enabled only when Correlation Mode is activated).

Auto Start: Toggles on/off. If unchecked, the Select Logs to Correlate panel does not
open or display. To reactivate or re-open this dialog, select Correlation Ribbon >
Select Logs to Correlate, and you may check the Auto Start option. If this option
remains checked, this dialog will always open when Correlation Mode is activated.
Quick Section: Click to create a new cross section only for the selected/checked logs. See
Quick Cross Section for more details.
Close Selected: Click to close the selected/checked logs (except for tie logs, where the
checkbox button is absent).
Add Logs: When clicked, the Filter Wells dialog will open. The user can choose to
display only wells with the selected data types. Unchecking all options will display all
wells. (For more information on Filter Wells, see Project Map.)

397
 Close: Closes the Select Logs to Correlate panel.

12.4 Quick Cross Section

The Quick Section option allows a user to view how the logs are arranged before saving it to a
'real' cross-section.
· First, be sure you’re in Correlation Mode. Select Correlation ribbon Correlation
Mode.
· Then select Correlation Ribbon > Quick-Section OR right click on any of the logs
in the Main Application Window, and select Quick Cross Section.

Quick Cross Section Example

For a given project, if the user creates multiple quick sections in the same session, each quick
section - by default - is named “Cross Section1”, “Cross Section2”, etc.
If a user selects Quick-Section more than once, the previous Quick Section will be closed.
The user must save the previous quick section as a “real” cross section, or else lose this work.
Quick Cross Section can also be accessed through the Select Logs To Correlate panel.

12.5 Scroll To Panel

The Scroll To panel allows the user to efficiently scroll to the desired depth or marker (by

398
surface, fault, or correlation). This feature saves you trouble scrolling up/down the logs.

To activate/access the Scroll To panel

· Right click and select Scroll Logs To... - or click Correlation Ribbon > Scroll-To
(upper part of icon). The Scroll To panel appears as shown below. (NOTE: Scrolling is
discussed further in this tutorial.)

Scroll To panel

1) Depth: The user can select MD or TVDSS and type in the target depth.
2) Marker: The user can scroll to the log(s) by marker. The surfaces, faults, and
correlations in the logs are conveniently displayed in and can be selected from the
dropdown list.
3) Auto Start: Toggles on/off. If unchecked, the Scroll To panel does not automatically
open or display when Correlation Mode is activated. To reactivate or re-open this
panel, right click any document and select Scroll Logs To…, and you may check the
Auto Start option. If this option remains checked, this dialog will always open when
Correlation Mode is activated.
4) Scroll All Logs: Toggles on/off. This option can be used to scroll all logs at the same
time, and it can be turned off to only scroll the log you want to work on.

12.6 Strat Bar and Interpreters

This subsection describes the Strat Bar, including the various options available within this
interface. You will also be introduced to a feature called Interpreters.

12.6.1 The Strat Bar

The Strat Bar is displayed in the main application window where the surfaces or faults are
displayed.

399
12.6.2 Interpreters Button

Opens the Select Interpreters dialog. The interpreters (i.e., authors) are categorized by
how the surfaces are added in a log (imported, added by the current user, or added by other
users).
· For items added by the user, the user’s username is displayed as interpreter. For
imported items, “Import” is displayed. By default, the current user’s name and “Import”
are displayed first in the list, consecutively, but they can be moved up/down. (The
interpreters list also displays when selecting Correlation Ribbon > Interpreters.)
· The interpreters of the manually entered markers can also be viewed in the Markers Tab
of the Well Properties dialog. The “active” interpreter is selected by default -
“Interpreter” dropdown selected as “Active”. For this dropdown, the display options
are to see “ALL”, “Active”, or a specific single user.
· New interpreters are created when a user edits an imported top - or another user’s.
New interpreters are also created when opening another user's cross sections, or
opening another user's AOI (area of interest).
o (NOTE: To set interpreter preferences, go to File Preferences. Under Set

400
 Default Properties, select Project....)
· The Select Interpreters dialog can also be accessed through the Well / Logs,
Correlation, or Cross-Section tabs, by selecting Interpreters.
· In some cases where the user wants to work on another user’s tops (e.g., tops created
in another application), the user can assign the other user’s credentials as an alias. To
set interpreter alias, go to section Setting or Deleting Interpreter Alias.

12.6.3 Right-Click Options

· Add/Edit Surface(s)…: Opens the Project Level Surface Table (Strat Panel).
· Search…: Highlights on the first surface containing the text typed into the Find Name
dialog.
· Correlation Point Mode: Used to create a “temporary” non-top tool called a Generic
Correlation Point (GCP) for help during correlation. A GCP can be changed to a
surface any time (see Marking Tops and Bases).
· Turn Off Tool: Turns off the Tops or Faults tool, closing the Strat Bar. To turn back
on, select Correlation Ribbon > Tops or Faults (hot keys are Alt+T and Alt+F,
respectively).
· (NOTE: The Strat Bar doesn’t automatically display when activating a cross section.
However, it can be activated the same way as explained here).
· Within the Strat Bar, select a top/fault (surface) and right click to access the following
options (in addition to the right click options above):
o Scroll to '[name of surface]': Aligns all open logs to the selected surface (top/fault)
(e.g., Scroll to 'F-14'). Logs can then be scrolled individually.
o Lock on '[name of surface]' (One): Aligns all open logs to the selected surface and
locks the scrolling accordingly. (NOTE: Scrolling is locked when using the scroll bar
- not the scroll wheel. If in Correlation Mode, select Lock Scroll. To scroll all
logs, hold down the Shift key and then hold down left mouse button. The scroll bar
does not exist in Correlation Mode.)
o Lock on '[name of surface]' (Two): Aligns all open logs to both the first surface
(Lock on '[name of top/fault]' (One)) and a second, normalizing the lengths of the
logs accordingly. Again, scrolling is locked. (NOTE: This activates only when Lock
on '[name of surface]' (One) is set first. Again, scrolling is locked only when using
the scroll bar. If in Correlation Mode, select Lock Scroll. To scroll all logs, hold
down the Shift key and then hold down left mouse button.)

12.7 Lock on Surface and Compress/Stretch Log Mode

401
The Lock on Surface is a good tool to use to be able to see a bigger but normalized view. In
addition, the Compress/Stretch Log Mode is another good tool to use to be able to see a
bigger view of those data in compressed and stretched mode. Both tools are only available
when Correlation Mode is activated.

To use the Lock on '[name of surface]' tool

(NOTE: A tie log does not need to be set to use this feature.)
· Select Correlation Ribbon > Correlation Mode.
· In the Strat Bar (on the left side of the main window), right click on the first surface you
want to work on.
· Select Lock on '[name of surface]' (One).
· Select your second desired surface. Select Lock on '[name of surface]' (Two).
(NOTE: Lock on '[name of surface]' (One) must be activated first.) The Strat Bar will
show a lock icon on each of the selected surfaces, as shown below.

· All logs are normalized to the length between the two selected surfaces of the far left
well log.
· To unlock a surface, right click on a locked surface and select Unlock '[name of
surface]' ([One/Two]) (e.g., Unlock 'F-12' (One)).

402
To compress/stretch a log

· Select Correlation Ribbon > Correlation Mode.

· Select Correlation Ribbon > Compress/Stretch.
OR
· Right click on an image/LAS file and select Compress/Stretch Mode.

· The cursor should change to the following icon: .

o If the Tops or Faults tool is activated, you will need to hold the Shift key.
· To compress, hover the cursor over the data of the log you want to view clearly. Hold
and drag the mouse up; then release where you want to stop. Repeat this process for
other logs, if needed.
· To stretch, hover the cursor over the data of the log you want to view clearly. Hold and
drag the mouse down; then release where you want to stop. Repeat this process for
other logs, if needed.
· To return to normal, click Correlation Ribbon > Reset ALL.
· To deactivate Correlation Mode select the Correlation Mode button on the ribbon
again.

12.8 Post Surface

Log Correlation mode can post surfaces in three different ways. "Posting surfaces" means
that surfaces from one log are added to others that don't already have them.

403
To post surfaces, right click on a log or a top within one of the logs. Go to Post Surfaces, and
select one of the three options. The second and third options are for tops only. The third option
applies only when two different tops are "locked" in the Strat Bar (as per Section 12.7). The
three options are described below:

· All from 'Tie log'

(NOTE: There must be a set tie log to use this option.)
o All surfaces in the tie log will be added to all open wells.
o Normally, when tops get posted from one log onto another, they are placed at the
same depths as the original log.
§ NOTE: Sometimes, for a given log, a top may get posted between two tops
already in the log. For example, a log may already have Tops T and V - but not
U. When "U" gets posted, it will be between T and V (assuming the tops are in
alphabetic order). The T-U and U-V distances should have the same ratio as
those of the original log.
o To make better sense of what this function does, see the illustrations below:

404
· 'Selected' on all open Wells
o Go to your target log.
o Right click on a surface (e.g., Top "V") and select the option.
o The selected surface will be posted to all open wells.
o Normally, when tops get posted from one log onto another, they are placed at the
same depths as the original log. In this case, the top will be the same depth as in
your target log (regardless of whether there's a tie log).

405
· ALL between two locks
(NOTE: There must be a set tie log to use this option.)
o In the Strat Bar, lock two different tops, as per Section 12.7.
o Between the two locks, all surfaces in the tie log will be added to all open wells.
(The tops with the locks are not included.)
o Normally, when tops get posted from one log onto another, they are placed at the
same depths as the original log.

406
407
13 Additional Well Log Tools and Features
· Input Well Header Manually
· Add TIFF/LAS to Existing Well
· Log Type Manager
· Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set
· Freeform Drawing
· Annotate Well Logs

13.1 Input Well Header Manually

If you do not have well data available for import, the information may be easily entered
manually. Each log is required to have, as a bare minimum, the API/UWI number or the well
name. After entering and saving the information, a database entry is created - just as if the
well header data had been imported.

To enter Well Data Manually

· Right click on a log and select Properties....

OR
· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Properties.
· Select the Well Header tab.

408
 · Fill in required fields (API/UWI and/or Well Name) plus any other pertinent data.

NOTE: Well coordinates can be typed in LON/LAT or X/Y. If typing in X/Y values, the Map
System and units will need to be set for the project. If it hasn't already been set in Project Map,
then the user will be prompted to do so on this panel.

See also:
Well/Log Data Import
Add TIFF/LAS Files to Existing Wells

13.2 Add TIFF/LAS to Existing Wells

Assigning Image/LAS Files to Existing Wells: Well Choice and Setup Dialog
If well data have already been imported or entered manually and you want to assign log
image/LAS files to them, this can be done through the Well Choice and Setup Dialog (Well
/ Logs ribbon > Well/Logs > Open Wells...). Each well has the Scan Log... and Add Log...
buttons next to it.

Scan Log
This option is for use with the NeuraScanner. The scanner will be launched directly from
NeuraSection, with the file auto-named with the well information. Once the scan is complete,
it will open in NeuraSection and be assigned to the well.

409
Add Log
This option allows the user to browse for any image/las file to be assigned to the well. Once
the logs are selected, the Select Log Type dialog opens up.

Assigning Image/LAS Files to Existing Wells: Well Header Tab

Once TIFF images and LAS files are imported into your project, they need to be assigned to a
well if they were not linked during import with embedded API#'s. If well data has already been
imported or entered manually, you will just need to associate them, as shown below.
· Right click on an opened LAS or image file.
· Select Properties....
OR
· Choose Properties from the Well / Logs ribbon.
· Select Well Header tab.
· Click on the Assign... button to display the Well Choice and Setup dialog.

410
· Choose well to assign log image or LAS file to and click OK.

· When you return to the Well Header tab, well information will be filled in automatically.

411
13.3 Log Type Manager
Assigning Log Types to Image/LAS Files
Well logs can be assigned a consistent log type quickly with searches in file name and/or
description as shown below:
· Choose File Preferences.
· Under Set Default Properties, select Project.
· Click on Log Types and Select to display Project Log File Manager.

412
Proprietary and Vendor Log Type Alias List Manager
In the Project Log File Manager, click Manage List… (under Search and Set Log Type
and/or Density Matrix). This opens the Log Type Manager dialog.

413
 Each Data Vendor corresponds to a different "Alias List".

13.4 Annotations & Graphic Overlays

· Annotate Well Logs
· Annotation Properties
· Adding Graphics
· Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set
· Freeform Drawing

13.4.1 Annotate Well Logs

Annotations may be added to Well Logs or Cross Sections at any time. Annotations can also
be added to Project Maps and Areas of Interest (AOIs).
For annotations/graphics associated with specific wells, we recommend they be marked on
each well document. This way, they can be carried between Cross Sections and Projects.

To add an annotation
· The following instructions are mainly for Well Logs - but things work similarly for
other documents.
· To add a Text Annotation, go to the appropriate ribbon: Project Map, Area of Interest

414
 (AOI), Well / Logs, or Cross-Section. Then select Annotations > Text Box.
· Left click in the document where you wish to place the annotation. This will bring up the
Annotation dialog (also see Annotation Properties).

· Enter the text in the keyin box.

· To keep the text aligned with a chosen depth, select the Tie Text To Depth checkbox.
· Format text, rotation, background, and border.
· Add a .bmp, .jpg, .emf, or .wmf using the Add Picture... button. This image will be
anchored to the text.
· Insert separators (horizontal lines) using the Separator button.
· Turn the Border and the Pointer on/off.
· Select OK when done.

Things to know about annotations

· The following descriptions are mainly for Well Logs - but things work similarly
for other documents.
· You can edit an annotation by right clicking on it and selecting Properties... (to access
the Annotation dialog; also see Annotation Properties). Or you can double click.
· Again, to keep the text aligned with a chosen depth, you can select the Tie Text To
Depth checkbox.

415
 · In the text editor, you can use the standard Windows shortcuts for Cut (Ctrl+X), Copy
(Ctrl+C), and Paste (Ctrl+V).
· You can change the Color, Font and Justification of the annotation. All formatting
applies to all lines of the annotation.
· You can insert any number of horizontal lines, called separators, between lines of text.
· You can add multiple images to the annotation (again, all will be anchored to the text).
· Remove an image by selecting it in the image pulldown and then choosing the Remove
Image button.
· Move the image by dragging it, once the annotation is created. This will change the
location of the image relative to the text, while still keeping it anchored to the text.
· Dragging the text will automatically drag all images associated with it.
· You can copy/paste text or images. To do so, hover over an individual text box or image.
Press Ctrl+C. The pasted item will be considered a new annotation. (If a text annotation
has images associated with it, copying/pasting the text makes a copy without the
images. If you copy an image associated with a text box, it will also be pasted as its own
annotation.)
· Turn a border or pointer on/off. Set its thickness.
· Move an annotation by selecting with the Selection Tool and dragging.

13.4.2 Annotation Properties

416
 Composite Figure - Annotations for Well Logs vs Cross Sections

Text
· Color...: Text Color.
· Font...: Font Style.
· Justification (dropdown next to Font… button): Set Alignment.
· Text Type (dropdown after Justification): 'Text' is standard text that isn't exportable
other than to another NeuraSection project. (NOTE: This dropdown is available for well
documents - not cross sections.)
o Text type can be changed to Casing Point, Mud Weight, Paleo, or User Defined.
o Setting annotation will allow user to export text to a Generic ASCII file.
o Text can be imported through the Generic ASCII / Excel Loader if 'depth', 'type', &
'string' is available in the file.

Insert
· Separator: Adds a 'separator line'.

417
 · Add Picture...: The following file types can be used: .bmp, .jpg, .wmf, .dib, or .emf.

Border
Turn a border on around the text.

Pointer
Add a pointer coming from the text that can be stretched.

Opaque Background
Turn on an opaque background behind the text.

Single Line Rotate (Deg)

Type rotation amount in degrees. (NOTE: This works only for single lines of text without
borders.)

Tie To TVDSS
Text stays tied to TVDSS during re-scaling. (NOTE: Option is available for cross section only.)

13.4.3 Adding Graphics

To add a graphic file to a Well Log, Cross Section, Map, or AOI

1. Drag and drop from Windows Explorer.

2. Browse for graphic through the Annotation Tool. Go to the appropriate ribbon:
Project Map, Area of Interest (AOI), Well / Logs, or Cross-Section. Then select
Annotations > Insert Picture or Insert Symbol or Lithology.
The following graphic types can be added: .wmf, .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .img, .emf, and .dib.

13.4.4 Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set

Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set

Upon installation of NeuraSection's Program Files, a \Metafiles folder was created under \nds
directory. This folder contains four basic symbol sets (Basic Drawing, Engineering,
Geological Modifers, and Lithologies) - plus six USGS symbol sets (Glacial and
Periglacial (Series 500), Igneous (Series 300), Misc and Metamorphic (Series 400),
Sedimentary (Series 200), Sedimentary Lithology (Series 600), and Surficial (Series
100)).

418
These symbols are easily added to your documents. (Note: You are not restricted to using the
included symbol sets. Any .bmp, .wmf, .emf, and/or .jpg can be added to any NeuraSection
document.)

Examples: , ...

13.4.5 Freeform Drawing

The Freeform tool allows you to draw any shapes you want. For example, it can be used to
color pay zones directly on your logs or in your Cross Section. (NOTE: Anything drawn or
annotated on a log can be used in any other Cross Section or Project.)

To add/edit a Freeform

· Go to the appropriate ribbon: Project Map, Area of Interest (AOI), Well / Logs, or
Cross-Section. Then select Annotations > Freeform.
· The Freeform tool allows a freeform shape in the form of straight segments. Just click
to add segments.
· To add a point between two other points, just click on the line segment.
· To switch endpoints, hover over the other endpoint. Then resume clicking.

· To set properties, right click on the segment and select Properties….

o Options include Line Style (style type, color, and thickness), Fill Style (style,
“hatch”/“lithology” [“hatch” is for “hatched” fill style], color, and “hatch size”), and
Opacity.

419
· Select OK when done with the Properties panel.

420
14 Net Count (Sand Count)
A net-count symbol allows you to highlight and measure a sand interval - or an interval for
some other lithology or rock property. In earlier versions of NeuraSection, "net counts" were
known as "sand counts". These symbols are rectangles, and you can draw them much like a
normal rectangle.

14.1 Create and Set Properties

· First, make sure the Well Log is depth calibrated.
· Click on Well / Logs ribbon > Net-Count.
· Hold down mouse and drag cursor to select an area. This will create a net-count
symbol.

421
· Right click on highlighted symbol and select Properties.... The Net Count Properties
dialog opens.

422
 · Data Type - Sand, Oil, Gas, Shale, User Specified, etc.
· Color - Choose color. (The fill is translucent.)
· Lithology Fill - Select Lithology Fill from dropdown list. The default is Sand.
o If desired, choose Browse for More.... You can browse for other included lithology
fills. Or you can use any .bmp, .wmf, .emf, or .jpeg you would like, and it will tile
automatically (i.e., copies of itself to form a regular pattern).
o For more details, see Add Graphics / Custom Lithologies.
· Size - Changes the size of the pattern for the lithology fill.
· Top - Top depth of the sand interval.
· Base - Base depth of the sand interval.
· Total - Thickness of selected interval (auto-calculated).
· Total for No - Total thickness of all sands in log (auto-calculated).
· Show Sand Counts - Un-check to hide the sands.
· Zero Count - Mark interval as '0' for display during mapping.
· Lock to Depth - Option to lock count to depth. (This way, re-calibrating the log does
not displace the location.)
· Display ALL Sands as Zones - Option to display ALL sands as “zones” - rectangles
extending across the image.
· Primary Sand Count Log - Display and use sand counts from Primary log ONLY.

14.2 Display ALL Net Counts (Sands) as Zones

NeuraSection offers the option to display all net counts (sands) as zones. There are separate
settings for logs and for cross sections.

Display All Net Counts (Sands) as Zones - For Logs

· In a log window, right click on a sand (net count) and select Properties…..
· In the Net Count Properties dialog, select Display ALL Sands as Zones.
· This setting affects all log windows.

423
Display All Net Counts (Sands) as Zones - For Cross Sections
· Right click in a cross section window, and select Properties….
· In the Section Properties dialog, go to the Options tab.
· Under Alternate Display Options, select Sand Picks as Zones.
· This setting applies to only to the specific cross section.

424
 (
N
O
T
E
:

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

r
i
g

425
 h
t

c
l
i
c
k

m
e
n
u

i
s

f
o
r

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
a
l

c
r
o
s
s

s
e
c
t
i
o

426
 n
.

T
h
e

r
i
g
h
t

c
l
i
c
k

m
e
n
u

f
o
r

S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
i
c

c
r

427
 o
s
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

l
o
o
k
s

s
l
i
g
h
t
l
y

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
.
)

14.3 Align, Set Width, and/or Change Color of Selected

Data Type
· Activate the Selection Tool (Well / Logs ribbon > Select).

428
 · Hover over the target sand (net count).
· To select all like sands, right click and select Sand Count Layout Select All Like
Sands. All symbols of the same type should appear outlined in red.
· To align like sand symbols (i.e., rectangles) by their left edges, right click and select
Sand Count Layout Layout of Like Sands Align Left.
o The other like symbols should align with the symbol you right clicked on.

· To set all sand symbols (i.e., rectangles) to the same width, right click and select Sand
Count Layout Layout of Like Sands Match Widths.
o The other like symbols should match the width of the symbol you right clicked on.

14.4 Sand Display Tab

You can also edit various properties of Net Counts (Net Sands) in the Well Log Properties
dialog. You can display, create, edit, and delete net sand/pay values for each formation and
sand data type defined on the well (can be imported or manually entered).
Data types include the following:
· Sand
· Limestone
· Gas
· Oil
· Porosity
· Porosity %
· Shale
· Mudstone
· Salt
· Igneous/Volcanic
· Anhydrite/Gypsum
· User Specified
In the Well Log Properties dialog, under the Sand Display tab, you can access the
rectangles you've already added.

429
View/Edit Net Properties
· Right click on log to select Properties....
· In the Log Properties dialog, enter the Sand Display tab.
· Highlight and right click a surface row to display/edit Properties of each 'count' within
the selected surface.

Add Net Values WITHOUT Selecting On Log

430
 · Right click on log to select Properties....
· In the Log Properties dialog, enter the Sand Display tab.
· For a selected row, right click on the target data type (column).
· Enter Net value.

IMPORTANT: Net Values entered directly in the Well Properties dialog (rather than edits to
properties of a rectangle that was initially drawn) WILL NOT display on the log but WILL POST
on an AOI. If sands are then marked on the log, the 'well' net (denoted with an *) will be
overridden in the table and in the AOI. However, they will reappear if you delete the Net Count
(Sand) that you drew.

431
432
15 Trace Correlation
The Trace Correlation tool may be used to help correlate your logs. Afterward, the trace
results can be turned into freeforms. Traced curve is temporary unless it is turned into a
freeform.

15.1 Using the Trace Correlation Tool

To trace a section of curve

1) Go to the Correlation ribbon and select Trace. Or press Ctrl+T.

2) Drag rectangle around the curve section to trace.

3) Trace curve by dragging over it with left mouse button. Or try some of the autotrace
features shown on the hotkey list (described below).

433
To view tracer control hotkeys
· Right click inside yellow box and select Properties... (or press the 'P' key).
· In the Correlation Tracer properties dialog, click Show Tracer HotKeys.
OR
· Press the "K" key.

Tracing help
· Traced curve is temporary unless it is turned into a freeform.
o To convert to freeform, go to Correlation Tracer Properties dialog. Select Copy

434
 Curve to FreeForm.
· Ctrl+T toggles the tool on/off.
· Press the "K" key to show the list of hotkeys.
· The "P" key will display the Correlation Tracer properties dialog.
· The "C" key clears the current traced curve.
· Any # key (1, 2, 3, etc.) will change the trace line thickness.
· Press the "E" key to turn the cursor into an eraser. Press again to turn off.

15.2 Correlating with a Curve Trace

· Move the cursor to the edge of the yellow box - until it turns from an arrow to a hand.
· Hold down the left mouse button and drag to another well log window. (NOTE: The
yellow correlation box can be sized to stretch/squeeze the shape of the curve.)
o (NOTE: In this figure, there is a yellow Net Count, which causes the Trace Correlation
box to become somewhat camouflaged.)

15.3 Trace Correlation Properties

Right click inside the yellow box you've drawn (see Section 15.1), and select Properties... (or
press the 'P' key).

435
The Correlation Tracer Properties dialog will open up.

436
437
16 Checking/Adjusting Your Work
NeuraSection offers some convenient tools for checking your work. You can also change the
draw order for the various items you've added on top of a well document.

16.1 Checking Depth, Top, & Fault Event Markers

Once you have depth-registered the logs, picked tops, and marked faults, you may wish to look
over your work. The following tools are available to do this.

To check the depth markers you have placed in a single log

· Select Well / Logs Ribbon > Depth.
· Select the well log and then press "N" (for next marker) on the keyboard. You will see
the well log scroll to the next depth marker with respect to where you were in the
image. The marker will be scrolled to the center of the screen.
· Continue to tap the "N" key to scroll to each depth marker in the log.

To check the top markers you have placed in a single log

· Select Well / Logs Ribbon > Tops.
· Press the "N" key to scroll to the next top in the current well log.
· Repeat to scroll through all tops.

To check fault markers, select Well / Logs Ribbon > Faults and repeat the above process.

To check all events

· Select Well / Logs Ribbon > Select and repeat the above process.
NOTES:
· Depth markers will be included in the count, but they will be invisible unless you
re-select the Depth tool.
· After the last marker in the log is found, the search moves to the beginning of the log
and repeats.

16.2 Set/Change Draw Order for Any Selected Object

Any object (freeform, annotation, symbol, marker, etc.) may be selected and moved forward or
backward to display in the preferred order. This can be done for a single well or a cross section
-- along with Project Maps and Areas of Interest (AOIs) .

438
439
Well Log / Cross Section

440
 Project Map / Area of Interest (AOI)

· Activate the Selection Tool. (To do so, go to one of these ribbons, depending on the
document: Well / Logs, Cross-Section, Project Map, or Area of Interest (AOI). Then
click on Select.).
· Right click on an object.
· Go to Draw Order and select one of the following options: Move To Front, Move To
Back, Move Forward, or Move Back.

16.3 Checking Correlations of Events across All Logs

Available tools
· Select Well/Logs ribbon Correlation Mode.
· Turn on Lock Scroll (… Scroll-To Lock Scroll), so that all logs will scroll
together.
· Select the Top Marker tool (… Tops).
· Tap the “N” key. You will see all logs scroll to the next top pick. This will, in effect,
flatten the logs on the event.
· Continue scrolling through the top picks until you’re satisfied with your work.

441
17 Export Well Data
Well data export is handled in a manner similar to well data import.

You have two main Well Choice options:

1) Select File Export Well / Log Data....

OR
2) In a Project Map or Area of Interest:
a) Right click and select Select a group of wells. Or select Project Map ribbon
Select Select Group of Wells.
b) Drag a box around the wells to export.
c) Right click and select Export Selected Wells.

442
18 Well Data Export Options
Export WELL Data

· ALL Wells in Project

· Choose From Well List
· Selected Cross Section(s)
· Well(s) from Project Map Selection - Displayed only when exporting a selection of
wells from the Project Map or an AOI.

Export TEMPLATE to Existing Project

· Strat Panel and Log Type Table

· Custom Table

Workflow for exporting Well Data or Templates.

443
 Extra option when exporting a selection of wells from the Project Map or an AOI.

18.1 Export ALL Wells in Project

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Under Export Well Data, select ALL Wells in Project. Then click Next.
· Select Export File Type:
o GCS Well and Top
o GeoGraphix WellBase V2
o GeoGraphix WellBase V3
o GeoGraphix WellBase V4
o Generic ASCII
o MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
o Neuralog Database (can export to new or existing database)
o NeuraWell XML
o Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
o GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1
· To complete the export process, follow the instructions for the selected Export File
Type (go to Section 19, or to one of the links above).

444
18.2 Export SELECTED Well(s)
1. Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
2. Under Export Well Data, select Choose from Well List. Then click Next.
3. Select the well(s) you want to export from the Select Logs to Export panel. Then click
Next.
4. Select Export File Type:
o GCS Well and Top
o GeoGraphix WellBase V2
o GeoGraphix WellBase V3
o GeoGraphix WellBase V4
o Generic ASCII
o MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
o Neuralog Database (can export to new or existing database)
o NeuraWell XML
o Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
445
 o GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1
5. To complete the export process, follow the instructions for the selected Export File
Type (go to Export File Types, or to one of the links above).

18.3 Export SELECTED Cross Section(s)

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Under Export Well Data, select Selected Cross Section(s). Then click Next.
· Select the cross section(s) you want to export from the Select Logs to Export panel.
Other options:
o Show all Logs button - On/off. When on, it displays all logs associated with the
project.
o Show wells belonging to sections (checkbox) - On/off. When on, it arranges the
wells according to the cross sections they belong to. (If a well belongs to multiple
cross sections, it will be repeated for each cross section.)
· Select Export File Type:
o GCS Well and Top

446
 o GeoGraphix WellBase V2
o GeoGraphix WellBase V3
o GeoGraphix WellBase V4
o Generic ASCII
o MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
o Neuralog Database (can export to new or existing database)
o NeuraWell XML
o Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
o GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1
· To complete the export process, follow the instructions for the selected Export File
Type (go to Export File Types, or to one of the links above).

See also:
Well Data Export Options

18.4 Export Wells from Selection in Project Map or Area

of Interest (AOI)
447
· Open the Project Map or an Area of Interest (AOI).
· Right click and select Select a group of wells.
· Drag a box around the wells to export. The wells will be highlighted in the Log List
View.
· Right click and select Export Selected Wells.

448
· Under Export WELL DATA, select Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Click Next.
· Select/deselect logs to export. Again, click Next.

· Select Export File Type (see Export File Types). Then click Next.
· To complete the export process, follow the instructions for the selected Export File
Type (see Export File Types).

449
18.5 Export TEMPLATES for Strat Panel and Log Type
Table
Exporting the Strat Panel and Log Type Table template will export tables to another
NeuraSection project.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Under Export Well Data, select Strat Panel and Log Type table. Then click Next.
· From there, select a project to export to. Click the Project... button and select a project
database (.mdb). Click Next.
· In Step 4, you can change the Map System - but other than that, there's nothing that
needs to be done here. Click Finish.

18.6 Export TEMPLATES for Custom Table

450
Custom Tables are extra tables that can be viewed in Neuralog Desktop in the Well
Information panel. Exporting the Custom Table template will export the Custom Table
name, which will become a new tab in the Well Information panel in Neuralog Desktop.
To use this feature, the project must already have Custom Tables. Otherwise, the
option will not appear.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Under Export Well Data, select Custom Table. Then click Next.
· From there, select a project to export to. Click the Project... button and select a project
database (.mdb). Click Finish.

· In Neuralog Desktop, when you open the other project, you should see the new tab(s),
named after the custom table name(s) you exported.

451
452
19 Export File Types
NeuraSection can export well data for an entire project, select wells only, or wells tied to a
specific cross section using the Export Wizard.
· GCS Well and Top
· GeoGraphix WellBase V2
· GeoGraphix WellBase V3
· GeoGraphix WellBase V4
· Generic ASCII
· MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File
· Neuralog Database (can export to new or existing database)
· NeuraWell XML
· Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003
· GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1

19.1 GCS Well and Top

The GCS Well and Top Data file format exports Well Header and Top information.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select GCS Well and Top. Then click the Export File Name
button...
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

453
· Click Next.
· Set the Map System (projection). Select the data type(s) you want to export. Then click
Finish.

454
 · Click Finish.
· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

· A file (in *.gcs format) is generated and saved.

19.2 GeoGraphix WellBase V2

The GeoGraphix WellBase V2 file format exports Well Header, Top, Fault, Directional and
Production Test information.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V2. Then click the Export File
Name button...
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

455
· Click Next.
· Set the Map System (projection). Select the data type(s) you want to export. Then click
Finish.

· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

456
 · A file (in *.asc format) is generated and saved.

19.3 GeoGraphix WellBase V3

The GeoGraphix WellBase V3 file format exports Well Header, Top, Fault, Directional and
Production Test information.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V3. Then click the Export File
Name button...
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

457
· Click Next.
· Set the Map System (projection). Select the data type(s) you want to export. Then click
Finish.

458
 · As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

19.4 GeoGraphix WellBase V4

The GeoGraphix WellBase V4 file format exports Well Header, Top, Fault, Directional and
Production Test information.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select GeoGraphix WellBase V4. Then click the Export File
Name button...
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

459
· Click Next.
· Set the Map System (projection). Select the data type(s) you want to export. Then click
Finish.

460
 · As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

19.5 Generic ASCII

Generic ASCII Export enables the user to output any data collected in NeuraSection's
database in a columnar format. It works very much like the Generic ASCII Loader. This export
file type includes (but is not limited to) export of the following data:
· Sand Count - Sand Type and Interval, Porosity %
· Formation Tops - by Interpreter option or Interpreter column option

To export

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).

· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select Generic ASCII.
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

461
· Click Next.
· Choose the Delimiter you would like your file to use, and Data to be exported.

462
· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

19.6 MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File

The MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File format exports Well Header, Top, Fault, Directional
and Production Test information.
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select MJ Systems LogSleuth Well File.
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.

463
· Click Next.

· Click Finish.

464
 · As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

19.7 NeuraSection Project (Database) Export

With the export to Neuralog Database option, users can export well data to new created
project or existing NeuraSection project. This option works with an Access or SQL database.
· Export Well Data to New Created Project
· Export Well Data to Existing NeuraSection Project
Users can export all or selected wells to an existing NeuraSection project, as well as cross
sections. This is an easy way to merge projects and keep the file size under control - without
having to duplicate any work from project to project. When this selection is made, the user will
choose another NeuraSection project (.mdb file) as the Export File. The wells selected
will take with them the following information and attributes:
· All well information associated with that well - including tops, production data,
deviation surveys, etc.
· Calibrated logs and/or LAS files
· Annotations posted on well log
· Freeforms drawn on well log
· Metafiles, bitmaps, etc., posted on well logs

In addition, the Surface (Strat Panel) and Log Type tables may also be exported to
destination NeuraSection project by choosing the Strat Panel export option on the Main
Export Wizard page. Once a Strat Panel has been populated for an area, it can be shared with
other projects to save setup time.

19.7.1 Export to New Project (Database)

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).

· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.

465
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select Neuralog Database.
· Select your database type (Access or SQL).
· Click the Create New Project button.

For Access

· To create a new project, click the Create New Project button.

· In the New Project dialog, enter the name of your new project. Click OK.
o The new project should automatically be selected as the project to save to (*.mdb
database file).

· To change the project, perform the following steps:

o Click the Project… button.
466
 o Select another database (*.mdb).
o Then click Save.
o The selected project is now selected as the project to save to.

For SQL
· To create a new project, click the Create New Project button.
· In the Select Data Source dialog, select the Server. Click OK.
· In the New Project dialog, enter the name of your new project. Click OK.
o The new project should automatically be selected as the project to save to (*.mdb
database file).

467
 · To change the project, perform the following steps:
o Click the Project… button.
o Select another database (*.mdb).
o Then click Save.
o The selected project is now selected as the project to save to.

Next Steps (for both Access and SQL)

468
· If needed, set the Map System (defaults to Geodetic Latitude / Longitude-DEG WGS
1984).
· Click Finish.
· The Image Location Options dialog pops up. Select one of two choices; then click
OK.
o Copy Logs to Project - Copies logs to the new project
o Link to existing Directory - Creates links to all documents from the current
project. No logs are copied to the new project.

· As wells are exporting, you will see the progress bar, as shown above.
· If any wells are associated with AOIs or cross sections, a dialog will ask whether you
want to export these items, too (after making your decision, click OK):
o All cross sections
o All AOIs (Areas of Interest)

469
 · When export is complete, the exported data are saved in the new project database.

19.7.2 Export to Existing NeuraSection Project

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).

· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select Neuralog Database.
· Click the Project… button.
· Select an existing NeuraSection project database (*.mdb file).
· Click Save.

470
 · Back in the Export Wizard panel, click Next in the Export File Type list.
· If needed, set the Map System (defaults to Geodetic Latitude / Longitude-DEG WGS
1984).
· Click Finish.
(NOTE: The data types for this type of export are preselected and disabled.)

471
 · In the Image Location Options, make your selection. Then click OK.

· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

19.8 NeuraWell XML

472
 · Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select NeuraWell XML.
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.
· If needed, set the Map System (defaults to Geodetic Latitude / Longitude-DEG WGS
1984).
· Click Finish.
(NOTE: The data types for this type of export are preselected and disabled.)

19.9 Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003

· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.

473
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select Landmark OpenWorks 98.5 - 2003.
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.
· If needed, set the Map System (defaults to Geodetic Latitude / Longitude-DEG WGS
1984).
· Click Finish.

· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

474
19.10 GeoQuest Finder 8.1 - 9.1
· Select File Export Well / Log Data... (ALT + E).
· Select desired export list: ALL Wells in Project, Selected Well(s), Wells from Selected
Cross Section, or Well(s) from Project Map Selection. Then click Next.
NOTE: The next panel will depend upon the option chosen in the previous step. You may go
directly to export type selection, or you may go to a list of wells to choose for export (see Well
Data Export Options).
· Under Export File Type, select GeoQuest Finder 8.5 - 9.1 .
· Select a path to save the file. Enter the export filename, and click Save.
· If needed, set the Map System (defaults to Geodetic Latitude / Longitude-DEG WGS
1984).
· Click Finish.

475
· As wells are exporting, they will appear as shown below:

476
20 Open Existing Wells
Wells from the current project database may be opened at any time.
· If a log file has been associated with the well, it will be loaded into NeuraSection.
· If multiple log files exist, you will be able to choose which log to open - or you can
open all.
· If no log file exists, a placeholder document is opened.
NOTE: Any annotations, depth markers, tops, etc. previously stored in the well will be
loaded, whether or not an image or LAS file is displayed.
Also see the following items:
· Map View Tips
· Right Click Options for Wells and Cross Section Lines
· Well Choice Grid
· Project Map Well Selection
· Area of Interest Well Selection

20.1 Project Map Well Selection

To aid in the selection of wells to be loaded from a project, NeuraSection provides a Project
Map of the wells in the database. To appear in the Project Map, the wells must have
latitudinal/longitudinal data or projected (x,y) data. Wells without location data will appear in the
list below the map as grayed lines. They are still selectable from this list.
For Project Map to be effective, you must already have your well database established with
LAT/LON or (X,Y) data. This is normally done by importing data from another source, such as
WellBase. Once this is done, the wells are easily selected using the Project Map.

To open Project Map

· From the Project Map ribbon, select Project Map.
OR
· Select File > Open > Project Map … (Ctrl + M).

Filter Well Display

· Ctrl+Alt+M or Project Map ribbon Well-Filter
o The Filter Wells dialog opens up.

477
To Open a Well in Project Map
· Hover over a well symbol to highlight.
(NOTE: Multiple wells can be opened at once by clicking with the left mouse button to highlight.
Once all desired wells are selected, highlight the connecting 'line' and complete the instructions
below.)
· Right click while well symbol (or line) is highlighted.
· Select Open Well(s) Only.

20.2 Area of Interest Well Selection

Wells and cross section lines are opened the same way in an Area of Interest as they are in
Project Map:
· Hover over a well symbol to highlight.
(NOTE: Multiple wells can be opened at once by clicking with the left mouse button to highlight.
Once all desired wells are selected, highlight the connecting 'line' and complete the instructions
below.)
· Right click while well symbol (or line) is highlighted.
· Select Open Well(s) Only.

20.3 Well Choice Grid

The Well Choice Grid is used in many forms in NeuraSection, including Project Map. From

478
the main panel, in addition to the standard sorting and filtering, the user may also view a list of
logs (TIFF/LAS) associated selected wells and open.

Two Views Available For Opening Wells

· Show Wells - List of wells noting the number of associated image/LAS files.

· Show Logs - Open specific logs (TIFF/LAS).

479
Filter List of Wells and/or Logs
· Filtering Wells - Well list can be filtered to display a defined subset of data.

480
21 Working with Cross Sections
NeuraSection has a broad toolset for building, designing, and working with cross sections. This
section walks you through the most important features.

21.1 Create & Save a Cross Section

To create a cross section, make sure all the wells you wish to include are open and properly
depth registered (see Depth Register Log Images). Only the image within the topmost and
bottommost depth markers will be displayed in a cross section.
While you can create a cross section without marking tops beforehand, we recommend you do
as much work as possible in advance to prepare the wells. This way, you minimize the amount
of editing to be done after the cross section is created. Wells can, however, be easily edited,
and new wells added, even after the cross section is created. Just remember that any work
done on the well itself (color fills, freeforms, annotations, bitmaps/metafiles, etc.) can
be used in multiple cross sections and projects without any excess work.

21.1.1 Creating a Cross Section

To create a Cross Section, follow the example below:

· Select File New Cross Section.
· Depending on your preferences, you may see the Select Cross Section Template
dialog. If you don't want to use a template, select the following checkbox: "Create New
Cross Section (No Template)".

481
· If a well filter is already on, the Filter Wells dialog will open. In that case, choose your
settings and click OK.

· If no logs are open, the Well Choice and Setup dialog opens up. Choose the wells to
include in the cross section.

482
· If a log is already open, a dialog will ask if you want to add all open logs.

· If you choose no wells, an empty document will appear. If you choose (a) well(s), the
Section Properties dialog opens. In that case, choose your settings and click OK.
· To add logs, select an open log, right click and choose Add to Cross Section >
Selected Log.

483
OR
· Right click in the cross section and choose Add ALL Logs to Cross Section.

OR
· Select Cross-Section ribbon > Cross-Section > Add Well.

484
 · When you start adding logs, the Cross Section Properties dialog appears, as shown
below.
o Enter the Top Depth (Top Offset).
o Enter the Bottom Depth (Base Offset).
o Change to desired Log Depth Scale (Global Log Depth Scale).
o Click OK when done.

NOTE: The Top and Bottom depth default values in this panel are calculated based on the first
and last depth markers and entered in subsea or TVDSS values.

485
Alternate way to create a Cross Section:

· Open the Project Map. To do so, go to Project Map ribbon Project Map (or File >
Open > Project Map...).
· Select wells on the Map. To do this, click on wells in the Map, and/or click in the list
below the Map.
· A black line will connect the wells - in the order you selected them.
· Right click on this line and select New Cross Section.
· Afterward, the Cross Section Properties dialog appears. From here, follow the remaining
instructions described above.

21.1.2 Saving a Cross Section

To save a Cross Section:

· Select the cross section document and then choose File Save to save the cross
section. Enter the name in the panel that appears as is shown below.

486
21.1.3 Viewing & Working with Well Logs + Cross Sections
Together

To see the Well Logs and the Cross Section at the same time:
· Select Well / Logs ribbon Auto Arrange. Your view should be similar to below.

· The logs will be arranged according to the order of the wells in the cross section.

While Auto Arrange is on, changing the order of the log windows changes the order
they appear in the cross section.

21.2 Cross Section Properties

487
The cross section properties can be changed easily from the Cross Section Properties
dialog.
· Right click on the cross section and choose Properties....

OR
· Choose Cross-Section ribbon Properties.

Cross Section Properties are explained further in the below subjects:

· Layout (Properties Tab)
· Title Block (Title Block Tab)
· Display Settings (Options Tab)
· Borders (Borders Tab)
· Well Order/Information (Well Info Tab)

21.2.1 Cross Section Layout (Properties Tab)

The Properties Tab of the Properties dialog sets Interval, Scale and Well Spacing
information for the cross section. Each setting of this tab is described below:

488
Structural/Stratigraphic

Sets the cross section display accordingly based upon selection. If Stratigraphic mode is
chosen, a top is selected to flatten the display on.

Top/Bottom Depth (Top/Base Offset)

For structural displays, the values will set minimum and maximum depth of the cross section
to display. For stratigraphic displays, the values will set the distance above and below the
selected datum.
Remember: Only portions of images within depth marker boundaries are shown. Therefore, if
no image or only a partial image appears for a well, you may need to add depth markers to
that well image at the top/bottom of the track - or extend the range of your cross section.

Datum

· For structural, “0” is for Sea Level or for a selected depth.

· For stratigraphic, “0” is for the chosen top.

Log Depth Scale

Sets normalization of the log to control (vertical) presentation size (e.g., inches to feet).

Well Spacing

· Allows well to be spaced at equal distances (Equi-Distant - from center of log), equal

489
 spacing (Equi-Spacing - edge to edge), or at distances derived from their LAT/LON
values (Geo-Proportional).
· LAT/LON values must be present in the well database in order to be used.

Horizontal/Vertical Factor (Geo-Proportional), Spacing Factor (Equi-Distant), or

Spacing (Inches) (Equi-Spacing)

· Under “Well Spacing”, there’s a box controls how much the wells are spaced in the
cross section. When Geo-Proportional is set, this setting is called “Hor./Ver. Factor”.
When Equi-Distant is set, this setting is called “Spacing Factor”. When
Equi-Spacing is set, this setting is called “Spacing (Inches)”.
· Controls the spacing between wells to control the presentation size. A greater
horizontal/vertical factor reduces the horizontal space.

21.2.2 Cross Section Title Block (Title Block Tab)

A title block can be added to your cross section through the Properties dialog. Each setting of
the title block tab is described below:

Font

Set font size, style and color for each line of the title block.

Add Image...

490
Add your company logo or other graphic (.bmp, .wmf, .jpg, .emf).

Line Thickness

Set border line thickness.

Draw Title Block

Toggles existing title blocks on/off.

Opaque Background

Toggles solid white background on/off.

NOTES:
· The title block is 'tied' to the bottom right hand corner by default.
· To move the title block to another corner, use the Selection (Cross-Section ribbon >
Select) or Annotation tool (Annotations > Text Box) and drag it to another corner. It
will snap to the closest corner.
· The title block can be edited any time via the cross section Properties dialog or the
title block’s own Properties dialog.

21.2.3 Cross Section Display Settings (Options Tab)

Presentation options may be set for your cross section on the Options tab. Each setting is
described below:

491
Display in Cross Section

· Well Zones: Zone fills directly on each log. (Well zones are created by right clicking on
a cross section document and selecting Fill > Well Log Zones).
· Interwell Zones: Well zones filled between wells (created after connecting related tops
[auto-connect on by default] and selecting Fill > Interwell Zones).
· Missing Sections: Missing sections defined for faults in the Fault Properties are
displayed as breaks in the log (these items appear in Stratigraphic mode).
· Deviations: Toggles display on/off. Deviations does a 'shifting' of pixel lines based
on the survey.
o When checked, wells will be displayed along their projected well paths if a
deviation survey is present for that well.
o In addition, when checked, the Perp Projection (Perpendicular) option can now be
selected. Well Zones and Horiz. Deviations become disabled.
o When checked, Sand Picks as Zones (option under Alternate Display Options)
492
 also becomes disabled.
Tip: Deviations can also be enabled by selecting Cross-Section ribbon > Deviations.
· Horiz. Deviations: Toggles display on/off. Horizontal Deviations takes each line and
actually deviates the whole line - instead of just sliding left/right.
o When checked, wells will be displayed along their projected well path if a deviation
survey is present for that well.
o In addition, when checked, the Perpendicular Projection option becomes
available. Deviation becomes checked (if unchecked) and disabled, and Well
Zones becomes unchecked (if checked) and disabled.
· Perp. Projection: Enabled when either Deviations or Horiz. Deviations is checked.
Perpendicular Projection is a different way to project the wells along the plane.
· Top/Fault Labels: Toggles labels on/off.
· Depth Scale: Toggles on/off. Adds a movable depth scale stick when checked. For
Depth Scale properties, see Section 21.4.7.
· Distance Markers: Toggles display on/off. For Distance Marker properties, see
Section 21.4.8.
· All Text in Stick: Toggles display on/off. When checked, it displays the annotations or
texts associated with a log (if exist).
· Production in Stick: Toggles display on/off. When checked, it displays the Production
Data (PERF, DST, IP, CORE, SHOW, Well CUM) not associated with a top (if exist).

Log Scales

· At Log Top: Display log scales (for LAS files) at the top of each log.
· At Log Base: Display log scales (for LAS files) at the base of each log.

Alternate Display Options

· Show Well Header: Toggles display on/off.

· Headers at Log Base: Moves the generated well headers below the logs.
· Sand Picks as Zones: Stretches sand picks (symbolized as rectangles) made on
wells across each log to display as a zone.

493
 o Becomes disabled and unchecked (if checked) when either Deviations or Horiz.
Deviations (Display in Cross Section options) is checked.
· Show Contour Intersections: Displays 'X' marks in the cross section where
contours generated in an Area of Interest intersect the active cross section.
· Center to Center for Profiles: Changes the top/fault line across each log into a point
for more precise shaping of top profiles when present.
o Becomes disabled and checked (if not already checked) when Horiz. Deviations
(Display in Cross Section options) is checked.
· Structural Cross Section Scale: Toggles display on/off.

Production Test Data

· DST, PERF, IP, Core, Show, Well Cum: Toggles display on/off.

Monthly Production Data

· Monthly Prod: Toggles display on/off.

21.2.4 Cross Section Borders (Borders Tab)

494
Cross Section Borders (inches)
· Left, Right, Top, & Bottom: Cross section borders may be increased/ decreased as
desired.

Border Line Attributes

· For outside border, you can adjust line style, thickness, and color.

Print Section Info

· Toggles on/off. The cross section information is printed when checked.

21.2.5 Cross Section Well Order/Information (Well Info Tab)

The Well Info Tab offers the following options:

· Both system- and user-defined well sorting
· Well removal
· Turning all wells in cross section to Stick View

495
Characteristics
· Draw Order: Highlight a well on the well list and click arrows to move up or down. This
will change the order the wells appear in the cross section. (Note: By changing the
order manually, the Direction will automatically be set to User Selected).
· Direction: Display order for wells in the cross section. (Note: Largest Extents is the
default display order).
NOTE: For the wells affected by the reordering, reordering wells will REMOVE ALL interwell
zones.
· Remove WELL from Cross Section: To remove a well from the cross section,
highlight a well in the list (only one at a time) and click the X. (NOTE: Interwell zones
are removed between wells the deleted well was adjacent to.)
· Show All Wells as Stick View: This option will globally turn all wells in a cross section
to Stick View. (NOTE: Wells may be changed separately by using the Log File(s)
tab in the XWell Properties ).

21.3 XWell Documents

Well logs that appear in a cross section are called Xwells. They are made of one or more well
log files. These documents represent the pieces of image and LAS files added to the cross
section. As with other NeuraSection elements, XWells have properties that can be adjusted to
customize their appearance.

496
To edit XWell properties
· Turn on the Selection Tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Select).
· Hover your cursor over the well header of the well you wish to change (a red box will
display around it).
· Right click and select Properties....

Details of each tab are discussed in the following sections:

· XWell Well Header Display (Well Header tab)
· XWell Well Data Sources (Log File(s) tab)

21.3.1 XWell Well Header Display (Well Header Tab)

The well header is displayed on each XWell in the cross section and is editable via the XWell
Properties dialog. This dialog offers 5 lines of text and a well symbol for the well header.
Multiple log files (TIFF/LAS files) for a single well will share the same XWell header.

497
To edit XWell Header
· Turn on the Selection Tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Select).
· Right click on the target well header. Select Properties....

Definitions
· Font: Font may be edited for each well header line.
· Symbol Color: Adjust the color of the symbol.
The Symbol represents the Well Status (see Well Properties Well Header Tab).

498
 · Thickness: Increase or decrease symbol line thickness.
· Size: Increase or decrease symbol size.
· Border & Fill Color: Toggle border around header on/off. Adjust fill color (of box
behind the well header).
· Apply to All: Apply XWell Header changes to all wells in the cross section.
· Display at Top: Uncheck to have all Xwell headers appear below the logs.

21.3.2 XWell Data Sources (Log File(s) Tab)

In addition to header information, XWells have a variety of properties for the well logs
themselves. These include the following:
· Track assignment and draw order of well logs
· Darkening/lightening of any image logs
· Viewing the entire well as a single line or "stick"

To edit XWell Log Files

· Turn on the Selection Tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Select).
· Right click on the well header of one of the XWells. Select Properties....

499
Selected Log File Options
· Move to Track: Moves the selected image/LAS file to selected track. (For example, if
there are two tracks, then having one log in each track means two logs are next to each
other.)
· Image Darkness: Lighten/darken selected image in cross section.
· Draw Order: Changes the drawing order of logs to control which log is on top.
· Show in Cross Section: Hides selected image/LAS when option is unchecked.
· Remove LOG from Cross Section: Removes LOG from Cross Section (XWell
Header remains).
· Show Entire Well as Stick View: Displays well as a 'stick' in the cross section
presentation.
· Thickness: Set the line thickness of a Stick View well.

Changing a Log Track Assignment

When a well log (image or LAS file) is added to a cross section, it is placed in an XWell track.
If there is only one well log for the well, it is placed in Track 1. If there are multiple well
logs, then the user assigns each log to a track.
NeuraSection allows logs to be moved to other tracks whenever needed.

To move a log to another track:

· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· Select the well log (image or LAS file) you want to move from the Log File list.
· Select the track from the Move to track dropdown menu.
· Click Apply or OK. You will immediately see the change in the cross section.

500
The following are important notes about Well Log Track Assignment:
· Up to 8 tracks are supported.
· Any unused track has a width of zero in the XWell document.
· Well logs can all be placed in the same track or in multiple tracks.

Changing the Log Draw Order

If multiple logs are added to a single XWell track, they may overlay one another. This can
cause parts of the bottom logs to be hidden. If you are not satisfied with the order these XWell
logs overlap, you can adjust the order by clicking the Draw Order arrows.

To adjust the log drawing order:

· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· Select the log you want to edit from the Log File list.
· Click the up arrow for the Draw Order to move the log toward the front (unless it's
already the first item in the list). Or click the down arrow to move the log toward the
back (unless it's already the last item in the list).
· Click Apply or OK. You will immediately see the changes in your cross section well log
image.

Adjusting the Image Darkness

Image logs (not LAS files) in your cross section may be darkened or lightened. This might be
helpful, for example, if one image was darker or scanned at a different resolution and you want
all the images to appear the same.

To darken/lighten an image:
· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· From the Log File list, select the image you want to edit.
· Click the up arrow for the Image Darkness to darken the image. Or click the down
arrow to lighten the image.
· Click Apply or OK. You will immediately see the changes in your cross section XWell
log image.

Removing a Single Log from the XWell

Single image/LAS files may be removed from an Xwell in your cross section.

To remove image/LAS from XWell:

· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· From the Log File list, select the log you want to remove.
· Click Remove from Cross Section.
· Click Apply or OK. You will immediately see the changes.
501
NOTE: To completely remove a well from the cross section, go to the Cross Section
Properties dialog and select the Well Info tab.

Omitting a Log from the Cross Section

To keep a log from being displayed in your current cross section presentation without actually
removing it, simply uncheck the Show in Cross Section checkbox. This allows you to easily
hide and redisplay single well logs.
This might be useful if you created a cross section with multiple types of logs (e.g., LAS and
TIFF or Wells with Resistivity curves and wells with Sonic curves) and wanted a pair of cross
sections with one type of document each.

To hide a particular log in the cross section:

· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· From the Log File list, select the log you want to hide.
· Uncheck the Show in Cross Section checkbox.
· Click Apply or OK. You will immediately see the changes.

Using a Stick View for the Well

The Stick View option allows you to show the entire XWell as a stick, rather than showing
the TIFF images or LAS files. The events on the log(s) are still displayed, and profiles may be
draw to/from the stick view well. This option is useful, for example, for large presentations
where you want to include a complete set of wells - but focus on a few key wells.

To turn a well into a Stick:

· In the XWell Properties dialog, choose Log File(s) tab (as shown above).
· Select Show Entire Well as Stick View.
· Adjust the Thickness of the stick line (if needed).
· Click Apply or OK to see the changes.
NOTE: To turn all wells to stick view at the same time, go to the Cross Section Properties
dialog and select the Well Info tab.

21.4 Presentation Formatting

This section will describe presentation-formatting options that can be accessed by right clicking
in the cross section window. (Additional formatting may be done in the Cross Section
Properties dialog.) This section explores the following options:
· Connecting Tops & Filling Zones
· Hanging Structurally or Stratigraphically
· Deviated Well Display

502
 · Selectively Post Existing Tops on Cross Section

21.4.1 Connecting Tops & Filling Well Zones

Top Profiles and Well Zones fills are very flexible. They can be connected and filled all at once
or zone by zone.

Connect Related Tops

Adds connecting top profile lines of related tops between wells.
· Right click on a cross section document.
· Select Connect > Related Tops.

Fill Well Zones

Fills well zones (areas between tops) with color, with respect to the Strat Panel and the Zone
Properties dialog. This may also be done from any of the single well documents.
· Right click on a cross section document.
· Select Fill > Well Log Zones. Affects both log documents and cross section.

503
Fill Interwell Zones
Interwell zones are like well zones - except they are the areas between wells (areas between
lines connecting tops between wells).
· Right click on a cross section document.
· Select Fill > Interwell Zones.

Fill Selected Well and Interwell Zones

It’s possible to fill a selected Well Zone or Interwell Zone.
· Turn on the Top Marker Tool (Cross-Section > Tops).
· Highlight desired top marker. Right click and select Properties....
· In the Top Properties dialog, select the Zone Fill tab.
· Under Fill Dimension, go to the dropdown menu: Extend [top name] to Selected
top. Select the top to extend the fill to.

504
 · Click OK.
· Right click on the cross section document. Select Connect Related Tops.
· Right click and select Fill Interwell Zones. Notice that only the customized Well Zone
for the selected top receives an interwell zone.

21.4.2 Removing or Hiding Connecting Tops & Zone Fills

Top Profiles, Well Log Zones, and Interwell Zones can be hidden or removed any time.

Delete ALL Interwell Fills, Connecting Profiles, and/or Well Log Zone Fills from a
Cross Section
· From the Cross Section ribbon, select Remove ALL Interwell Zones, ALL
Connecting Top Profiles, or Well Zones.

OR
· From the Cross Section Document, right click and select Remove ALL

505
 Interwell Zones, Connecting Profiles, or Well Log Zone Fills.

Hide Selected Profile Lines

Directly from the Cross Section Document
· Right click on the cross section.
· Select Show/Hide Tops.
· Check tops to hide.

506
Hide Well Zone Fills
Directly from the Cross Section Document
· Right click on the cross section.
· Select Properties....
· Select the Options Tab.
· Uncheck Well Zones.

Hide Interwell Zone Fills

Directly from the Cross Section Document
· Right click on the cross section.
· Select Properties....
· Select the Options Tab.
· Uncheck Interwell Zones.

21.4.3 Connecting Related Faults

507
Adds connecting fault profile lines of related faults between wells. Related fault profiles and
markers can be connected with a single click.
· Right click on the cross section.
· Select Connect > Related Faults.

21.4.4 Structural View and Stratigraphic View

By default, the cross section is hung structurally, based on the depth interval chosen. When
displaying a cross section stratigraphically, missing sections defined in the Fault Properties
dialog are displayed as breaks in the image/las/. In addition, depth values will represent
distance above and below the selected datum (top).

To set a cross section to Stratigraphic

· Right click on a cross section and choose Properties... to get the Cross Section
Properties dialog.
· Under Depth Interval, select the Stratigraphic radio button and choose a top of
interest from the Datum pulldown menu.
· The values for Top Depth (Top Offset) and Bottom Depth (Base Offset) are now the
distances above and below the selected top (Datum).
· The Well Spacing can be changed to Geo-Proportional. This causes the wells to be
spaced geo-proportionally (if LAT/LON location values exist in the well header).

508
 · The Horizontal/Vertical Factor can also be change to space the wells.
· Click OK when you are finished adjusting the desired parameters. (NOTE: The cross
section is automatically updated.)
You can easily return to structural mode by reselecting the panel, choosing the
Structural radio button, and resetting any other desired parameters.
A few other interesting Cross Section properties are displayed below:

21.4.5 Deviated Well Display

Deviated wells can be displayed in the cross section following their wellbore path, if deviation
surveys are present for the wells.

To turn this option on

· Right click on the cross section and select Properties....
· Select the Options tab.
· Check Deviations in the Display in Cross Section area.
· Click OK.

509
Things to note
· From the Options tab, well zones are automatically turned off (and disabled) when
Deviations is selected.
· LAS files are displayed as curves only (borders and grids are turned off)
· Well headers may be displayed below the wells by selecting Headers at Log Base
(under the Options tab).

21.4.6 Selectively Post Existing Tops on Cross Section

NeuraSection allows users to selectively post (show/hide) existing tops on cross sections -
without deleting them from the wells.

510
21.4.7 Depth Scale Properties

1) Turn on the Selection Tool (Cross-Section > Select).

2) Right click on the depth scale (red when highlighted) in the cross section.
3) Select Properties....

511
(NOTE: To display multiple depth scales in a cross section, use copy/paste).

21.4.8 Distance Marker Properties

· Turn on the Selection Tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Select).

· Right click on a distance marker in the cross section. Select Properties....

512
21.5 Add Additional Wells to a Cross Section
Additional wells may be added to your cross section at any time. With this action, be aware
that connecting profiles may be removed. In addition, spacing will change - which could affect
annotations/bitmaps added prior to the change. It is recommended to Save (or Save As) your
cross section before making a major change.

To add a well to our existing Cross Section

· Right click on the target log.
· Select Add to Cross Section > Selected Log. You will see the cross section
document updated as the new well was added to it. (NOTE: If the log is added between
two existing wells, connecting profiles between the two wells are removed like shown in
the example below.)

To add a log to an existing well in the Cross Section

· Right click on the target log.
· Select Add to Cross Section > Selected Log.
· The log will automatically be added to a new track.

513
 · To change the track, right click on the well header and select Properties…. In the
XWell Properties dialog go to the Log File(s) tab, select the log in the list, and select
a track number in the Move to track dropdown menu.

In the example above, we placed the second log in a different track than the first log. We
could have placed them in the same track, but then one log would have covered the other. At
any time, if we wish to switch tracks for either log, we would do so with the XWell Properties
Panel.

21.6 Cross Section Interpretation and Montage

Once the basic cross section has been constructed, you may perform freeform interpretations,
as well as creating a montage. These interpretations include top/fault profile editing,
annotations, graphics, and specialty tools such as unconformities and freeforms. In addition,
Tops and Faults can be marked directly on the logs in the cross section document. The
sections that follow describe how to perform interpretations through freeform editing.
Operations include the following:

· Top Profile
· Top Marker
· Fault Profile
· Fault Marker
· Breaking Top Profiles at Faults
· Unconformities
· Facies / Freeform
· Annotations

514
 · Graphics

21.6.1 Top Profile

To edit a Top Profile

· Select Cross-Section ribbon > Top Profile.
· Click on any profile to select it. You will see control points at either end of the profile.
NOTE: A profile may also be the boundary of a filled zone.

· Click on the profile to insert a new control point.

515
 · Drag each inserted control point to shape the profile.

· Continue to insert and drag control points until you get the desired profile shape.

To end the edit of the profile

· Double click on the cross section.
OR
· Press Ctrl + E (end edit).

Things to note during profile editing

· Any number of control points may be added to a profile.
· The 'squares' at each end of the profiles show the 'snap' points.
· A profile may be deleted by selecting, right clicking and choosing Add/Edit… > Delete.
Or you can activate the selection tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Select), highlight the
profile (by hovering over it), and press Delete.
· If you delete a top profile, it can be restored by right-clicking in the cross section and
selecting Connect > Related Tops. (Any previous shaping will be lost.)
· To change profile from 'smooth' to 'point-to-point', select profile (be sure Top Profile

516
 tool is on), right click, and choose Properties....
o In the Surface (Top) Properties dialog, go to the Type dropdown menu. Select
Point-to-Point.

See also:
Top Profile Properties

21.6.2 Top Profile Properties

To access Top Profile Properties, go to the Cross-Section ribbon and select Top Profile.
Select your target profile. Then right click and choose Properties.... You will see the Surface
(Top) Properties dialog.

Line Style
· Style: Set line style.
· Type: Set smooth curve or point-to-point line type.
· Thick: Set line thickness.
· Color...: Set line color.

Fill Style
· Style: Default fill style is 'hollow'. Only shapes are filled.
If the profile is not a straight line, selecting a fill style will make it into a shape. (When
there is a fill, a straight line is added to complete the shape.)
· Lithology: Default Lithology fill is 'none'. Only shapes are filled.
· Color...: Fill color.

517
 · Size: Size of the lithology pattern (for shapes).

Unconformity
Changes line style into an unconformity. Once the line is set as an unconformity, close the
dialog.
Now go to the Cross-Section ribbon and select Unconformity Profile. Select your target
profile. Then right click and choose Properties.... You will see the Unconform Profile
Properties dialog.

21.6.3 Top Marker

Tops may be picked and/or adjusted manually by clicking directly on a well in the cross section
document. Or this can be done directly on a calibrated well log image or LAS document
window. The initial surface list should be built in the Strat Panel. Or if another project already
has it set up, you can export the Strat Panel from one project to another.

Mark tops
· Choose a well in the cross section.
· Turn on the Top marker tool (Cross-Section or Well / Logs ribbon > Tops).
· Click directly on the well and a top marker will be created.
· The Top Properties dialog only appears automatically when creating a new top. If you
would like to change properties of a selected top, activate the Tops tool
(Cross-Section ribbon > Tops), right click on the top marker, and select Properties….
A top will be automatically named based on its order in the well log document and the existing
tops stored in the Strat Panel. If you pick the first top, the next tops you pick will be given the
next surface name in the list. If there were no surfaces in the Strat Panel, the top pick would
518
 receive a default name of “UnNamed Top1”. You would then enter the name of your choice.

Tips for Picking/Editing Tops

· The top pick auto-naming order is driven from the Strat Panel (Project Level Surface
Table) (Cross-Section or Well / Logs ribbon > Master Strat).
· Top order, name, and color defaults should be edited on the Strat Panel.
· Top names, color and font may also be edited by accessing the Top Properties dialog.
· Any number of tops may be selected in any order.
· Tops may be added at any time on a calibrated log (from the log document or from the
cross section).
· Tops may be moved up/down by selecting and dragging (from the log document or from
the cross section).
· The Measured Depth of the top (called the “Depth”) may be manually set by typing a
depth on the Top Properties dialog or in the Well Properties dialog under the Markers tab.
· Flatten tops stratigraphically across all open well log documents to check marker
placement by turning on the Top Marker and Scroll Lock tools at the same time (Well
/ Logs ribbon > Master Strat and Scroll-To > Lock Scroll). With one of the well
document windows active, press the 'N' key. Each time the 'N' is pressed, it will scroll
to the next surface and flatten all other wells on the same surface.

Formatting Top Picks

· Top picks may be formatted to change their color and font. Their labels may also be given an
opaque background, or all fonts may be set to black.

See also:
Zone Fills
Top Marker Properties

21.6.4 Top Marker Properties

To access Top Marker Properties, go to the Cross-Section ribbon and select Tops. Select
your target top marker. Then right click and choose Properties.... You will see the Top
Properties dialog. Top marker properties may be edited at any time.

519
Top Marker Tab

1) Top Name - Select an existing surface from the dropdown menu, or type a new surface
name (which will be added to the current Strat Panel).
2) Measured Depth - Measured depth calculated from the calibrated log.
3) Base - Set the depth of the base.
4) Units - Set the units for the depth.
5) Post with ALL Tops - If MD and/or TVDSS is checked, the measured depth and/or
true vertical depth subsea values will display below the top marker. The font will always
be half the size of the top label and display in black.
6) Lock to Depth - With this option activated, tops will move based on both changes in
the depth value and changes in the depth calibration. This option is checked by default.
7) Show Dialog on New - With this option activated, this dialog box will pop up whenever
a new top is added. If it is turned off, it will appear only if the Strat Panel is not populated
- or the program determines a new surface needs to be created.
8) Line Type - Set the line type.
9) Line Thickness - Set the line thickness of a single surface or all top markers in your
project.
10) Font Properties - Basic font properties can be set here, as well as, turning all the
top/fault labels to the color black and/or setting the background of all the labels to
opaque.
11) Draw Below the Line - Option to draw name of top below the line.
12) Show Base Text - Option to show the name of the base.

520
21.6.5 Fault Profile

Fault profiles are created and edited in almost the same way as top profiles.

To create/edit a fault
· Select Cross-Section ribbon > Fault Profile.
· Click in the cross section to draw the fault, as shown below (and earlier in this section).
You may optionally connect a fault profile to a fault marker. The fault profile will "snap"
to the fault marker when it gets near the marker.

· Click to draw and shape the fault.

· Edit the fault profile as you would a top profile.

To edit 'Throw' arrows

· Select Cross-Section ribbon > Fault Profile.
· Click in the fault profile to edit.
o To size: Hover over the slip symbol as shown below. The point to be edited will turn
red and can be 'dragged' to resize the pair of arrows (in particular directions).

521
 o To move: Hover over the slip symbol, as shown below. In this case, none of the
control points should be red. The slip symbol may now be 'dragged' up/down the
fault.

Things to note during profile editing

· Any number of control points may be added to a profile.
· The 'squares' at each end of the profiles show the 'snap' points.
· A profile may be deleted by hovering over the item and pressing Delete.
· To change profile from 'smooth curve' to 'point-to-point', hover over profile (with the
Fault Profile tool on), right click, and choose Properties....
· To adjust the 'throw' of top profiles along the fault profile, hover over profile (with the
Fault Profile tool on), right click, and choose Properties....

See also:
522
 Fault Profile Properties

21.6.6 Fault Profile Properties

To access Fault Profile Properties, go to the Cross-Section ribbon and select Fault
Profile. Select your target fault profile. Then right click and choose Properties....

Line Style
· Style: Set line style.
· Type: Set smooth curve or point-to-point line type.
· Thick: Set line thickness.
· Color...: Set line color.

Fill Style
· Style: Default fill style is 'hollow' for fault profiles. Only shapes are filled.
If the profile is not a straight line, selecting a fill style will make it into a shape. (When there is
a fill, a straight line is added to complete the shape.)
· Lithology: Default Lithology fill is 'none'. Only shapes are filled.
· Color...: Fill color.
· Size: Lithology size for polygons.

Fault Throw
For use when top profiles are 'broken'.
· Left: 'Slips' top profiles up/down on the left side of the fault profile.
A top profile is not automatically split by the fault. To split the top profiles around the fault,

523
select the Top Profile tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Top Profile) and click on one of the
profiles.
· Right: 'Slips' top profiles up/down on the right side of the fault profile.
· Show Arrows: Uncheck to turn throw arrow symbols off.

21.6.7 Fault Marker

Faults are marked in the cross section exactly in the same way top markers are placed. The
following instructions explain how to mark faults in a well Log. (NOTE: Faults may also be
added and/or edited from the Cross Section document window.)
· Select a calibrated well log.
· Select the Fault marker tool (Well / Logs or Cross-Section ribbon > Faults).
· Click in the log at the fault location.
· Enter the Fault's name and properties in the Fault Marker Properties dialog. If you
choose a fault in the Strat Bar, the fault will be named automatically, and you will have
to manually open the Fault Properties dialog (with the Fault Marker tool on, right
click on fault and select Properties…).
· Press OK when done.

21.6.8 Fault Marker Properties

To access Fault Marker Properties, go to the Cross-Section ribbon and select Faults.
Right click on the target fault and select Properties…. Fault marker properties are set in the
dialog below. They may be edited any time.

524
 1) Fault Name - Type fault name.
2) Measured Depth - Measured depth calculated from the calibrated log.
3) Lock to Depth - With this option activated, tops will move based on both changes in
the depth value and changes in the depth calibration. This option is checked by default.
4) Fault Type - Select fault type.
5) Missing Section Interval - Type missing section length. When the cross section is in
stratigraphic mode, the missing section will display as a “break” in the log (image,
LAS, and/or stick view).
6) Estimated Datum Top Offset (ft/m) - Type offset to enable accurate 'flattening' of a
selected surface in stratigraphic mode.
7) Post with ALL Faults - If Missing Section is checked, the value will display on the
same line as the fault name. The font will be the same size and color as the name. If
MD and/or TVDSS is checked, the measured depth and/or true vertical depth subsea
values will display below the top marker. The font will always be half the size of the top
label and display in black.
8) Line Thickness - Set line thickness to apply to one or all faults in a project.
9) Font Properties - Basic font properties can be set here.

21.6.9 Breaking Top Profiles at Faults

When a fault crosses a top profile, the top profiles the fault crosses will be broken as soon as
one top profile is selected. You can then slide the end points of the top profile up and down the
fault. See below.

525
· Using the Top Profile tool, select one top profile that a fault profile crosses.
NOTE: This causes all the top profiles the fault touches to be broken.

· Return to the Fault Profile tool.

· Highlight the fault and right click to select Properties....

526
 · Here is a little tutorial on how to adjust fault throws:
o Under Fault Throw, create an up-throw on the left and a down-throw on the
right.
o To do this, start by clicking the Left arrow up a few times.
o Then click Right arrow down a few times.

See also:
Fault Marker Properties
Top Profile Properties

21.6.10 Unconformities
527
Unconformities are a special type of profile and are created and edited similarly to other
profiles.
· Select the Unconformity Profile tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Unconformity
Profile).
· Follow the steps used in editing top profiles.

21.6.11 Facies / Freeform

Facies can be easily added to any cross section. They are drawn as freeforms and may be
placed anywhere in a cross section.
· Select the Freeform tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Annotations > Freeform).
· To create facies, follow the same steps as for editing profiles with 'control points'.

528
· Right click on the freeform and select Properties…. In the Free Form Properties
dialog, set the Fill Style and Color. Set the transparency using the 'Fill Opacity
Percent' slider.

· Click OK.

529
21.6.12 Annotate Cross Sections

Annotations may be added to your logs or cross section presentation at any time.
(NOTE: Annotations and graphics associated with specific wells should be marked on each
well document. This way, they can be carried between cross sections and projects.)

To add an annotation
· Select Cross-Section ribbon > Annotations > Text Box.
· Left click in the cross section where you wish to place the annotation. This will bring up
the Annotation dialog.

530
 · Enter the text in the keyin box.
· To keep the text aligned with a chosen depth, select the Tie Text To Depth checkbox.
· Format text, rotation, background, and border.
· Add a .bmp, .jpg, .emf, or .wmf using the Add Picture... button. This image will be
anchored to the text.
· Insert separators (horizontal lines) using the Separator button.
· Turn the Border and the Pointer on/off.
· Select OK when done.

Things to know about annotations

· You can edit an annotation by right clicking on it and selecting Properties... (to
access the Annotation dialog; also see Annotation Properties). Or you can double click.
· Again, to keep the text aligned with a chosen depth, you can select the Tie Text To
Depth checkbox.
· In the text editor, you can use the standard Windows shortcuts for Cut (Ctrl+X), Copy
(Ctrl+C), and Paste (Ctrl+V).

531
 · You can change the Color, Font and Justification of the annotation. All formatting
applies to all lines of the annotation.
· You can insert any number of horizontal lines, called separators, between lines of text.
· You can add multiple images to the annotation (again, all will be anchored to the text).
· Remove an image by selecting it in the image pulldown and then choosing the Remove
Image button.
· Move the image by dragging it, once the annotation is created. This will change the
location of the image relative to the text, while still keeping it anchored to the text.
· Dragging the text will automatically drag all images associated with it.
· You can copy/paste text or images. To do so, hover over an individual text box or image.
Press Ctrl+C. The pasted item will be considered a new annotation. (If a text annotation
has images associated with it, copying/pasting the text makes a copy without the
images. If you copy an image associated with a text box, it will also be pasted as its own
annotation.)
· Turn a border or pointer on/off. Set its thickness.
· Move an annotation by selecting with the Selection Tool and dragging.

See also:
Annotation Properties

21.6.13 Annotation Properties

532
 Composite Figure - Annotations for Well Logs vs Cross Sections

Text
· Color...: Text Color.
· Font...: Font Style.
· Justification (dropdown next to Font… button): Set Alignment.
· Text Type (dropdown after Justification): 'Text' is standard text that isn't exportable
other than to another NeuraSection project. (NOTE: This dropdown is available for well
documents - not cross sections.)
o Text type can be changed to Casing Point, Mud Weight, Paleo, or User Defined.
o Setting annotation will allow user to export text to a Generic ASCII file.
o Text can be imported through the Generic ASCII / Excel Loader if 'depth', 'type', &
'string' is available in the file.

Insert
· Separator: Adds a 'separator line'.

533
 · Add Picture...: The following file types can be used: .bmp, .jpg, .wmf, .dib, or .emf.

Border
Turn a border on around the text.

Pointer
Add a pointer coming from the text that can be stretched.

Opaque Background
Turn on an opaque background behind the text.

Single Line Rotate (Deg)

Type rotation amount in degrees. (NOTE: This works only for single lines of text without
borders.)

Tie To TVDSS
Text stays tied to TVDSS during re-scaling. (NOTE: Option is available for cross section only.)

21.6.14 Add Graphics / Custom Lithologies

Ways to add graphics

1. Drag and drop from Windows Explorer.

534
 2. Browse for graphic through the Annotation tool (Well / Logs ribbon > Annotations >
Insert Picture).

The following graphic types can be added: .wmf, .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .img, .emf, or .dib.

Creating custom "Lithologies"

535
When creating a freeform, you can choose a fill pattern. This fill pattern is called a "Lithology".
For example, in the figure above, the freeform is filled with Neuralog's "Sandstone" pattern.
This pattern is formed by taking Neuralog's "Sandstone" symbol and tiling it.
To choose a Lithology:
1. Turn on the Freeform tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Annotations > Freeform).
2. Right click on your target freeform, and select Properties....
3. Under "Fill Style", go to "Lithology". In the dropdown menu, select the target lithology
(e.g., "Sandstone").

If you cannot find the Lithology you're looking for, there are two ways to add it in:
· METHOD #1 (see figure below):
o Back in the Free Form Properties dialog, go to the "Lithology" dropdown and
select "Browse for More...".
o A dialog opens for you to select an image (.wmf, .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .img, .emf, and .dib.).
o After choosing an image, its filename appears in the "Lithology" dropdown. The
new image is now tiled inside the freeform.
o If you re-open the dropdown menu, you will find the new item at the end of the list.

536
· METHOD #2 (see figure below):
o With the Freeform tool (Cross-Section ribbon > Annotations > Freeform), click
on your target freeform.
o From Windows Explorer, drag your target image into the target freeform. (Actually,
you can simply drag into the cross section window. What matters is that your target
freeform is selected.)
o Afterward, the target image is tiled to fill the shape.
o If you go to the Free Form Properties dialog, you will see the filename given as the
"Lithology".

537
21.7 Create and Work with Multiple Cross Sections
Working with multiple views of your data set has never been easier. You can create and save
numerous cross sections without having to close any. Each cross section has its own set of
properties, while remaining interactively connected to included wells.

538
21.8 Metric Cross Sections
Users have the option to generate metric cross sections. In the Home ribbon, click Units to
change units in the project between English (E) and Metric (M). A mixture of English and Metric
logs may be used and calibrated as such.

539
21.9 Open Existing Cross Sections
Cross sections from the current project database can be opened at any time.
A cross section can be opened via any of the methods below:
· Cross Section Choice Grid
· Project Map
· Area of Interest

21.9.1 Cross Section Choice Grid

To open a cross section, you can go to Cross-Section ribbon > Cross-Section > Open
Cross-Section.... Or you can go to File > Open > Cross Sections....

540
(NOTE: Opening another user's cross section creates copy under new interpreter.)

Two Views Available for Opening Cross Sections

· Cross Section Name List - Displays saved cross sections and number of wells in
each.

541
· Show wells belonging to each cross section - Displays a list of specific wells
associated with each cross section.

542
21.9.2 Map View

To Open a Cross Section from Project Map View

· Hover over cross section line to highlight it (turns red).
· Right click and select Open.
· Select the cross section from the list, or create a new cross section with the same wells.

543
21.9.3 Area of Interest

To Open a Cross Section from an Area of Interest:

· Hover over cross section line to highlight it (turns red).
· Right click and select Open.
· Select the cross section from the list, or create a new cross section with the same wells.
(NOTE: Opening another user’s AOI creates copy under new interpreter.)

544
21.10 Printing a Cross Section
Cross Sections can be printed to any network printer/plotter, a JPEG file, or a TIFF file. You
may want to first print a draft copy to your office laser or inkjet printer.
NeuraSection printing scales the cross section to the page size. If needed, you can easily print
your entire cross section to an 8.5 × 11–inch piece of paper. (NOTE: A cross section can be
copy/into another application, such as PowerPoint for presentations or a quick plot.)

21.10.1 To Print a Cross Section

· Select File Print. The Print dialogue, shown below, will appear.
· Adjust the settings and select OK to print.

545
Printer
· Name: Select any network or local printer/plotter.
· Properties: Printer/Plotter Properties panel.
· Status: Printer/Plotter status.
· Type: Printer/Plotter selection.
· Where: Printer/Plotter location.
· Paper: Paper selection size.
· Print to file: Check this box to print to a file.
· RTL Printer: Raster Transfer Language: Leave on for HP plotters.

Document Size
· Width & Height: Print size.
· Scale: Percent scale of document printing.
· Fit To Single Page: With this option checked, the Width, Height, and Scale are
automatically calculated based on page size.
· Tile to [number] x [number] Pages: Number of pages it will take to print the
document at the scale chosen.
· Lock Aspect Ratio: By default, NeuraSection preserves the aspect ratio of your
cross section, map or well log document. This means that if you edit or scale the Width,
the Height is adjusted proportionally, and vice versa. If you do need to change the
aspect ratio for your printed document, you can do so. Simply uncheck the Lock Aspect
Ratio box. The Width, Height, and corresponding Scales will then not be tied together.
546
Orientation
· Portrait
· Landscape

21.10.2 HP DesignJet Plotter Printer

The RTL Plotter option found on the print dialog will be on by default. RTL, or Raster Transfer
Language, works with the HP plotter to speed up printing and use less memory.

To set the Properties for your HP DesignJet Plotter

· Click the Properties button on the Print dialog to get the Printer Properties panel.
o If you have an HP DesignJet series. Yours may look different, but should have
similar functionality.
o Select the appropriate orientation Portrait or Landscape.

Most cross sections need a landscape orientation because their width is greater than their
length. To verify this, inspect the cross section dimension and aspect ratio printed in the
lower right corner of the NeuraSection display.
If you are using continuous roll paper in your HP plotter, you will need to set the paper size.
You must know the width of your paper, and you will determine the length you want to use.

To determine and enter the paper size

· Make sure the correct paper source has been selected in the Paper source menu on
the printer panel.
· Calculate the paper length you want. Since we have a width of 36 in and an aspect
ratio of 2.213:1, we use 36 in × 2.213 = 79.65 in. We rounded up to use a calculated
length of 80 inches for our cross section.
· Enter the length. If necessary, press the More sizes button. The information is entered
on the subsequent panel. Then it appears in the Application page size box.
· For landscape printing, select the Zoom Smart option available on most HP Plotters
and make sure the paper size matches the custom size chosen.
· Select OK on the Properties panel.
· Select OK on the Print panel to begin printing.

21.10.3 NLI RTL Driver

Neuralog created its own printer driver that works with all RTL printer/plotters. This option will
override any printing limitations imposed by specific operating systems (such as a maximum

547
print length). Choosing this option also gives the user the freedom to either print to a file or
directly to their plotter/printer.

To use:
1. Select cross section or well to print
2. Select File Print....
3. Click the Name dropdown menu.
4. Select NLI RTL Driver.
5. Click Properties... to set Page Properties (size, resolution and quality) and Device
Properties (option to select a device to print to and internal device margins).

21.10.4 Print to JPEG or TIFF

Cross sections and logs can be printed to JPEG or TIFF files.

To use:
1. Select cross section or well to print.
2. Select File Print....
3. Click the Name dropdown menu.
4. Select NLI JPEG Driver or NLI TIFF Driver.
5. Click Properties... to set size, resolution, and quality.
6. Select preferred orientation (portrait or landscape).
7. Click OK to bring up Print to File window.

548
21.10.5 Troubleshooting Printing

Because NeuraSection deals with very large images, special care must be given to printing.
Large images not only tend to require large amounts of printer memory, but the time to print a
typical cross section can be excessive. This section provides some insight to NeuraSection
printing and gives troubleshooting hints.

Out of Disk Space/Memory

When printing, NeuraSection creates a temporary file in your \temp directory. The environment
variable temp will hold this path, typically C:\temp. If printing fails, indicating that you have run
out of memory, it could be because there is no space left on this drive.

Wrong Aspect Ratio

NeuraSection fits the current cross section to the selected page size. If the aspect ratio is
incorrect you may have selected an inappropriate page size. Problems might also occur if you
have changed any of the default printer settings related to page size or orientation - for
example, autorotate or inked area. These advanced features should only be used by users
familiar with the details of their plotter.

Slow Printing
While NeuraSection can gracefully handle very large cross section documents, the printing of
these documents can only be as fast as your printer. If you feel that printing is going too slow,
check to make sure you are using the default printer properties as discussed in the preceding
sections. Also check to make sure you have the correct printer driver installed.

549
21.10.6 Copy/Paste to Any Windows Application

Your cross section can be quickly incorporated into presentations and reports by simply copy/
pasting your document window.
· Select the desired document window to make it active.
· Copy (Ctrl+C or right click Add/Edit… Copy).
· Open Microsoft PowerPoint (or other Windows program).
· Paste (Ctrl+V or right click Add/Edit… Paste) into document.

21.11 Export Log Images

NeuraSection makes it convenient to export well log images. You can choose your target logs
directly from a dialog, and you can even export directly from the cross section.

21.11.1 Export Normalized Images Directly from Cross Section

PETRA and Geographix Calibrated Rasters can be exported from NeuraSection. (NOTE: Only
scale areas can be defined currently. Headers are to be added at a later date.)

· Choose Home Well Logs Export Calibrated Logs

550
OR

· Right click in the cross section document.

· Select Export Log(s).

· Select Well Logs to export

· Click Next

551
· Select PETRA Ready Logs or GeoGraphix Ready Logs file format.
· Select log image and calibration file folder location.
· Select location for well data file. (NOTE: PETRA exports WB2 file and GeoGraphix
exports WB3 file.)

552
NOTE: Single-image export works, too.

21.12 Delete a Cross Section

To delete Cross Sections completely from the database
· Under the Home ribbon, select Delete-Data Cross-Sections…. The Cross
Section Choice dialog opens.
· Select a cross-section to delete, then click the Delete button.
· Click OK to confirm.

553
Cross Section Choice additional options/features
· Show Wells belonging to Sections - Toggles on/off. When on, the wells are arranged
according to the cross sections they belong to. (If a well belongs to multiple cross
sections, it will be repeated for each cross section.) When you click on one well
associated with a cross section, the rest of the wells that apply will also get selected.

554
 · Preview Selected (button) - Opens the image of the selected cross section.

21.13 Cross Section Troubleshooting

Some well images are missing or partially missing
To create a cross section, make sure all the wells you wish to include are open and properly
depth registered (calibrated). Only the image within the topmost and bottommost depth
markers will be displayed in a cross section. Make sure you have placed calibration
markers at the top and bottom of the well track. Remember that deviation and
elevation information alter the measured depth. See Depth Register Log Images.

Tops are missing and connections are incorrect

Check well logs to make sure that tops are entered correctly. The top profiles in the cross
section may be deleted and reconnected (Cross-Section ribbon Remove All
Connecting Top Profiles).

Well Zones or Inter Well Zones are not filled

555
In the Cross Section Properties dialog, go to the Options tab. Make sure you have selected
the option to show the zone fills.

556
22 Project Map

To aid in the selection of wells to be loaded from a project, NeuraSection provides a Project
Map of the wells in the database. For Project Map to be effective, you must already have your
well database established with LAT/LON information. This is normally done by importing data
from another source such as WellBase. Once this is done, the wells are easily selected using
the Project Map.
NOTE: The wells must have latitudinal and longitudinal information to appear in the Project
Map. Wells without LAT/LON data will appear in the list below the map as grayed entries but
are still selectable from the list.
The Project Map will make it easier for you to select wells geographically. When the view is
first loaded, the well spots appear with well status symbols. Deviated wells are shown with
surface and bottom hole locations. By default, the map does not display well information.
Project Map properties may be set and saved to customize the map by project. To enhance
557
the view, you may display well information - as well as ArcView Shape files (.shp) saved with
LAT/LON information.
This interface includes the following features:
· Well Display
· Map Layers
· Map Display Projection

22.1 To Open Project Map

· Go to Project Map ribbon Project Map (or File > Open > Project Map...).
· If a well filter has already been applied, the Filter Wells dialog opens automatically.
Otherwise, you can go to Project Map ribbon Well-Filter.
· Choose a data type. Only wells containing this data type will be displayed. If multiple
criteria are chosen, wells matching at least one criterion will be displayed.
o To display all wells, uncheck all the boxes.
· Click OK.

558
22.2 Filter Wells Dialog
The Filter Wells dialog allows for display of only wells that meet certain criteria. If multiple
criteria are chosen, wells matching at least one criterion will be displayed.

Filter Wells (Advanced) button

· Click Advanced… to display the Advanced Filter Options. Click the More button to
add an additional advanced criterion. Click the Fewer button to delete the last advanced
criterion.

Advanced filter options

22.3 Map View Display Options

ArcView Shape Files
· ArcView Shape files may be loaded to display grids and other geographical markers for

559
 the area.
· You can set color, text display, line style, and line thickness for each layer.
· You can show/hide layers.

Bottom Hole AND Surface Locations

Surface locations are displayed with triangles.

Existing Cross Section Lines (Blue lines connecting well to well)

· Blue lines displayed connecting wells in each cross section.
· Load or create a new cross section by selecting a line (turning it red) and right
clicking to select Open [Cross Section Name] or New Cross Section.
· Selected cross section's name will appear in the lower left corner of the window (green
bar at the bottom).

Color Coded Well Symbols

· Red - TIFF and/or LAS files loaded for this well.
· Black - Well data exists (with LAT/LON information), but no TIFF or LAS files have
been loaded.

Display Well Header Text with Well Symbol (Toggle)

· Right click and select Display Well Headers to toggle on/off.

Full Well Properties Viewable

560
 · Right click on any well and select Properties.... Properties include the following:
o Well header
o Deviation survey information
o Log Files
o Top/Fault data already posted
o Production Data Posting by Surface
· Abbreviated well header and LAT/LON location of well are shown on the bottom green
bar of the window when each well is highlighted. (LAT/LON information is also
displayed for cursor locations anywhere in the view.)

Interactive Cross Section Selection Line

· As wells are selected, a black line is drawn in between.
· To open wells, move cursor over black line so that it turns red to select.
· Right click and select Open Well(s) Only or New Cross Section.
NOTES: If New Cross Section is selected…
· Wells with calibrated TIFF/LAS files: Wells will load and the Cross Section Properties
dialog will display (to select interval and other settings).
· Wells with un-calibrated TIFF files: Wells will load and put temporary depth markers of
0 and TD on images in order to display in the cross section.
· Wells without TIFF/LAS files: Wells will load and display in cross section in stick view if
TD of the well is set.

Existing Areas of Interest (AOI) (Green Boxes)

· To get a list of AOIs to open, right click on the Project Map and select Open
Open Area….

Hide / Restore All Wells, Cross Section Lines, AOIs

· To hide an item, right click on any well, cross section line, or AOI and select Show/Hide
Hide Selected Well / Cross Section Line / AOI Box.
· To restore the display, select Show/Hide Restore All.

22.4 Well Display

The Project Map allows for display of user-specified header information. It also allows the user
to hide/show cross section lines, Areas of Interest, or the map scale.
For the following features, right click on a Project Map, and select Properties…. The Map
Properties dialog opens. Go to the Well Display tab.

561
Well Display Properties
· Well Display Information: The user has the option to display 3 pieces of well header
information - 2 above the well symbol and 1 below.
· Font: Each line of well header information has its own Font button.
o The Data Posting Font button is for such data as Top of Formation text in an AOI
map.
· Display Well Header: Checking this box posts the selected well information around
the well symbols in Project Map.

Map Display Properties

· Hide Cross Section Lines: Checking this box will hide ALL cross section lines from
Project Map.
· Hide Areas of Interest: Checking this box will hide ALL Area of Interest boxes from
Project Map.
· Scale: Un-checking this box will hide the map scale of the logs in the cross section
from the Project Map.
· Number of Wells Displayed: This is the total number of wells being displayed in the
map, (NOTE: If you are looking at a filtered list of wells, the number of filtered wells will
display - not the total number of wells in the project.)

562
22.5 Map Layers
GeoTIFF, ArcView Shape, DXF, and DWG files can be loaded to display geographical data.
(NOTE: Files imported with LAT/LON data will automatically display. Those in UTM, State
Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must have their projection set in the Map
Layers tab before they will display on the map.)
Each map layer has its own settings, in the map layer table.
For the following features, right click on a Project Map, and select Properties…. The Map
Properties dialog opens. Go to the Map Layers tab.

GeoTIFF Files

NOTES:
· The .tif file is the primary file, but you must also have the partner .tfw file.
· The Map Display Projection must match the GeoTIFF projection in order to display
properly.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.
Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Disabled.

563
 · Display - Show/Hide layer.
· Text - Disabled.
· Font - Disabled.
· Thick - Disabled.
· Line Style - Disabled.

ArcView Shape Files

NOTES:
· The .shp file is the primary file, but you must also have the partner .dbf and .shx files.
· Shape files in LAT/LON will display automatically.
· Shape files in UTM, State Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must have
their projection set in the Map Layers tab before they will display on the map.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.

Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Set layer color.
· Display - Show/Hide layer.
· Text - Select text to display for each layer.
· Font - Font size and color for text.
· Thick - Layer line thickness.
· Line Style - Layer line style.

DXF and DWG Files

NOTES:
· DXF and DWG files have the following suffixes: .dxf and .dwg.
· DXF/DWG files in LAT/LON will display automatically.
· DXF/DWG files in UTM, State Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must
have their projection set in the Map Layers tab before they will display on the map.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.

Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Set layer color.
· Display - Show/Hide layer.

564
 · Text - Show/Hide text.
· Font - Font size and color for text.
· Thick - Layer line thickness.
· Line Style - Layer line style.

Map Image

NOTES:
· A map image file can be added, removed, and shown/hidden. The Display and Remove
options are only displayed when an image file is added.
· Display - Show/Hide image.
· Remove - Click to remove the selected map image.

22.6 Map Display Projection

Project Map can be projected to several Blue Marble mapping systems and set to a specific
map scale.
For the following features, right click on a Project Map, and select Properties…. The Map
Properties dialog opens. Go to the Map Display Projection tab.

· Mapping System: By default, Project Map is set to Geodetic Latitude. The mapping
system can be set to a variety of options - such as Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM), US State Plane 1927, or US State Plane 1983.
· Units: Units are automatically set to feet or meters, depending on the mapping system
chosen.
· Map Scale: Option to set a Relative or Absolute scale. Which options are available
depends on the mapping system chosen. (Note: Map Size at 100% is displayed below
565
 the set map scale.)

22.7 Map View Tips

· To select well(s), click on a well symbol in the map or a well entry in the list below.
Corresponding entries will be highlighted in both the Project Map and the list.
· A cross section line will be drawn to connect selected wells. Saved cross sections will
display in a similar manner, and are selectable from this view.
· Deselect any well by clicking on it again in the map or the list or deselect all by choosing
right click > Deselect All.
· Well Data can be sorted on the well list below the map for easy selection by clicking on
any column header in the list (UWI, Well Name, etc.). Clicking on the column heading
again will reverse the sort order.
· Well information is displayed on the status bar (green bar at bottom of window) when a
well symbol is highlighted.
· When you have selected the set of wells you wish to load, highlight the connecting line
and right click for options to open.
· The ruler tool (Project Map ribbon > Measure) has a point-to-point mode (in the
Ruler Distance panel, uncheck Drag Mode) that makes it easy to measure cross
section length while creating the new cross section line. At a given point, a well spot
can also be added (right click on point and select Add Well Spot).

22.8 Right-Click Options for Wells and Cross Section

Lines
Highlight a well or cross section line, and right click to open the following options:

566
Open

Existing Xsection Line - Highlight and right click on a cross section line.
· Open Well(s) Only
o Opens the wells associated with the existing cross section by themselves (no cross
section will open).
· Open New Cross Section
o Opens the associated wells in a brand-new cross section.
· Open [Cross Section Name(s)]
o Opens the existing Cross Section. (If there is more than one on the list, each of the
cross sections contain the same wells.)
Single Well (When highlighted/selected)
· Open Well(s) Only
o Opens single well.
o If there are multiple log files, user will have a choice to load ALL or selected logs
only.
· Open New Cross Section
o Opens single well and puts it in a cross section
Existing Section
· This displays a listing of ALL cross sections in the project (even when not selected).

567
 Any one of them can be opened any time in the Project Map by right clicking and
selecting this option.

Add/Edit Well Spots (toggles on/off)

· Use to create a new well location populated with LAT/LON values. NOTE: Additional
information can be added by right clicking and selecting Properties….
· To change LAT/LON values, just drag to a new location.

Properties…
· Right click on a well in map or on the well choice list below. Select Properties…. The
Well Properties dialog opens.
· Right click on a Project Map, and select Properties…. The Map Properties dialog
opens.

Display Well Headers

· Displays well header text around symbols on the map.

Select a group of wells

· Draw a rectangle around the area of wells you wish to export or open.

Export Selected
· Allows user to export select wells directly from the Project Map.

List Selected Wells

· Gives list of ALL wells in the selected cross section line.

Deselect All
· Clears all well selections.

Hide / Restore All Wells, Cross Section Lines, AOIs

· To hide an item, right click on any well, cross section line, or AOI and select Show/Hide
Hide Selected Well / Cross Section Line / AOI Box.
· To restore the display, select Show/Hide Restore All.

Zoom
· Options are the following: zoom in/out, select rectangle for zooming in, zoom back out
of rectangle, zoom to map extents, and zoom to fit map width.

Save Zoom Area

568
 · Option to save and name a zoom area so that it can be re-opened.

Zoom To (> Views …)

· Zooms to saved zoom area, AOI, or cross section line.

Scan Log

NOTE: This option is available for the NeuraScanner only. While scanning a log, you can
return to NeuraSection and queue up additional scans or continue working.
To Use:
· Right click on well you want to scan a log for.
· Select Scan Log .... to launch the Nscan software.
· The image name will default to API.tif or WellName#.tif but may be changed.
· Start scan in Nscan.
· When complete, the image will automatically link to the selected well in NeuraSection
project.

569
23 Area of Interest (AOI) - Gridless Mapping

NeuraSection's Area of Interest is a multi-dimensional mapping document. Within a defined

area (AOI), multiple maps can be generated, printed, saved and, exported - for multiple
formations in the active project. Data from the database (Formation Tops, Fault Information,
Net Counts, etc.) can be displayed in the AOI. Mapping and quality-control tools are user
friendly, to help generate quick maps.
(NOTE: NeuraMap NDS files [contours and simple faults] can be imported into an existing
Area of Interest, or a new AOI will be created from the extents of the NeuraMap file.)

23.1 Create Area of Interest (AOI)

Creating an Area of Interest (AOI) is done directly from Project Map. An area can be defined,
which will open up a new Area of Interest document window.

To quickly and easily generate maps in NeuraSection, follow the steps below:

· Define Area of Interest from Project Map

· Set AOI Properties
o Set Projection and Scaling
o Add Title Block

570
 o Show/Hide/Add/Remove Shape, DXF or DWG files
o Set Well Display
· Add Surface Map(s)
o Top of Formation
o Net Sand
o User Defined
· Add Fault Map(s)
· Generate Map(s)
o Display Data
o Add Contours
o Add Faults
· Export Map Data

23.2 Define Area of Interest (AOI)

To generate a new map from the Project Map, an Area of Interest must be defined.
1. Select Project Map ribbon Project Map (Ctrl + M).
2. Select Project Map ribbon AOI (upper half of icon) (Ctrl+Alt+A). Or right click
in the Project Map and select Define Area of Interest (AOI).

3. The cursor turns into a crosshair . Drag the cursor around proposed AOI (which
will create a green box, as shown below). The Area of Interest Properties dialog
comes up.
4. Type the Area Name.
5. Click Create AOI to create a new Area of Interest. (NOTE: A new document window
will open with the defined area and top surface list.)

571
23.3 Set Area of Interest (AOI) Properties (Map Properties
Dialog)
Once the Area of Interest is defined, you can start working immediately or adjust the following
properties:
· Well Display
· Map Layers
· Map Display Projection
· Area
· Title Block
(NOTE: Under Area of Interest (AOI) tab [lower half of icon], there are menu items for directly
opening the Map Display Projection, Well Display, and Map Layers tabs.)

23.3.1 Well Display Tab

Areas of Interest (AOI) have the option of displaying user-specified Header Information, as
well as turning on/off the display of any cross section line or well. These things can be done
through the Map Properties tab.

To access Well Display tab

· In the AOI ribbon, click Properties (upper half of icon).

572
 OR
· Right click in AOI window and select Properties….
· Click on the Well Display tab.

Well Display Properties

· Well Display Information: The user has the option to display 3 pieces of well header
information - 2 above the well symbol and 1 below.
· Font: Each piece of well header information has its own Font button. The Data
Posting Font button is for such data as Top of Formation text in an AOI map..
· Display Well Header: Checking this box posts the selected well information around
the well symbols in Project Map.

Map Display Properties

· Hide Cross Section Lines: Checking this box will hide ALL cross section lines from
Project Map.
· Hide Areas of Interest: Checking this box will hide ALL Area of Interest 'boxes' from
Project Map.
· Scale: Un-checking this box will hide the map scale of the logs in the cross section

573
 from the Project Map.
· Number of Wells Displayed: This is the total number of wells being displayed, (Note:
If you are looking at a filtered list of wells, the number of filtered wells will display - not
the total number of wells in the project).

23.3.2 Map Layers Tab

GeoTIFF, ArcView Shape, DXF and DWG files can be loaded to display geographical data.
(NOTE: Files imported with LAT/LON data will automatically display. Those in UTM, State
Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must have their projection set in the Map
Layers tab before they will display on the map.)
Each map layer has its own settings, in the map layer table.

To access Map Layers tab

· In the AOI ribbon, click Properties (upper half of icon).

OR
· Right click in AOI window and select Properties….
· Click on the Map Layers tab.

574
GeoTIFF Files

Notes:
· The .tif file is the primary file, but you must also have the partner .tfw file.
· The Map Display Projection must match the GeoTIFF projection in order to display
properly.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.
Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Disabled.
· Display - Show/Hide layer.
· Text - Disabled.
· Font - Disabled.
· Thick - Disabled.
· Line Style - Disabled.

ArcView Shape Files

Notes:
· The .shp file is the primary file, but you must also have the partner .dbf and .shx files.
· Shape files in LAT/LON will display automatically.
· Shape files in UTM, State Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must have
their projection set in the Map Layers tab before they will display on the map.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.

Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Set layer color.
· Display - Show/Hide layer.
· Text - Select text to display for each layer.
· Font - Font size and color for text.
· Thick - Layer line thickness.
· Line Style - Layer line style.

DXF and DWG Files

575
Notes:
· DXF and DWG files have the following suffixes: .dxf and .dwg.
· DXF/DWG files in LAT/LON will display automatically.
· DXF/DWG files in UTM, State Plane 1927 Datum, or State Plane 1983 Datum must
have their projection set in the Map Layers tab before they will display on the map.
· Files not being displayed will appear grayed out on the Map Layers tab.
Display Options:
· Projection - To set projection, click the respective cell in the Projection column.
o Set - Projection has been set (or in Geodetic LAT/LON by import default).
o UnSet - Projection is not set. This must be set in order for the file to display.
· Color - Set layer color.
· Display - Show/Hide layer.
· Text - Show/Hide text.
· Font - Font size and color for text.
· Thick - Layer line thickness.
· Line Style - Layer line style.

Map Image

Notes:
· A map image file can be added, removed, and shown/hidden. The Display and
Remove options are displayed only when an image file is added.
· Display - Show/Hide image.
· Remove - Click to remove the selected map image.

23.3.3 Map Display Projection Tab

Project Map can be projected to several Blue Marble mapping systems and set to a specific
map scale.

To access Project Map tab

· In the AOI ribbon, click Properties (upper half of icon).

OR
· Right click in AOI window and select Properties….
· Click on the Project Map tab.

576
Set the following features as desired
· Mapping System: By default, Project Map is set to Geodetic Latitude. The mapping
system can be set to a variety of options - such as Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM), US State Plane 1927, or US State Plane 1983.
· Units: Units are automatically set to feet or meters, depending on the mapping system
chosen.
· Map Scale: Option to set a Relative or Absolute scale. Which options are available
depends on the mapping system chosen. (NOTE: Map Size at 100% is displayed below
the set map scale.)

23.3.4 Area Tab

The Area tab in the Area of Interest Properties dialog displays information about the active
AOI.

To access Area tab

· In the AOI ribbon, click Properties (upper half of icon).

OR
· Right click in AOI window and select Properties….

577
 · Click on the Area tab.

Set the following features as desired

· Area Name: Name given to the Area of Interest when first defined. Enter this tab to
change the name.
· Top Left: LON/LAT coordinates of the top left-hand corner of the Area of Interest.
· Bottom Right: LON/LAT coordinates of the bottom right-hand corner of the Area of
Interest.

23.3.5 Title Block Tab

The Title Block tab in the Area of Interest Properties dialog will generate an interactive
Title Block in the active AOI. NOTE: If default values are kept in place, the formation name will
automatically change when switching between maps in the same Area of Interest. In particular,
the variable "<$FN>" is for extracting the formation name automatically.

To set an AOI Title Block

· Right click on an active AOI window and click the Title Block tab in the Map
Properties dialog, as shown below.

578
NOTE: If the information is unavailable, then one of these special entries (such as <$FN>) gets
rendered literally (as in showing “<$FN>” in the title block).

Set the following features as desired

· Font: Set font size, style, and color for each line of the title block.
· Add Image...: Add an image to the title block.
· Line Thickness: Set border line thickness.
· Draw Title Block: Toggles existing title block on/off.
· Opaque Background: Toggles between opaque and transparent background.

Notes:
· The title block is tied to the bottom right hand corner by default.
· To move to another corner, use the Selection tool or Annotation tool (Area of
Interest (AOI) ribbon > Select (upper half of icon) or … > Annotations > Text Box)
and drag to another corner. It will snap to the closest corner.
· The Annotation tool can also be used to resize the title block.
· The title block can be edited at any time via the Map Properties dialog or using the
Annotation tool.

23.4 Add Surface Map(s)

579
In the Strat Bar, Tops are also called "Surfaces". In an Area of Interest (AOI), these
"Surfaces" are shown in the list that appears beside the AOI window. This list is called the
"Surface Tree" (more details about this item in Section 23.4.3).
From here, "Surface Maps" can be added. Surface Maps display various properties for
selected surfaces. One example is the map for the depth of a layer top - called a "Top of
Formation" map. Another example is the map for the thickness of the respective layer -
called an "Interval Isopach" map.
NeuraSection offers a great library of map types to choose from (as long as the proper data are
properly imported or entered).

23.4.1 Adding a Surface Map Layer to an AOI

Adding a New Surface Map

· In the Surface Tree, hover over your target surface. (For example, you may have a top
named "E". In that case, it corresponds to a surface called "E".)
· Right click on the surface.
· Select Add Map [Map Type] (e.g., Top Formation, Interval Isopach, etc.). This
produces a new blank map. (See first figure below.)
o If you choose "Top Formation", then you can start mapping the depth of the layer
580
 top.
o If choose "Interval Isopach", then you can start start mapping the thickness of the
respective layer.
o There are many other options - such as "Oil Volume", "Gas Volume", "Net
Sand", and User-Specified items.
· When the new Surface Map is produced, the Contour Properties panel automatically
opens.

Inserting a Contour Map into a Surface Map

· Once you have a new Surface Map, you can add a Contour Map - based on the
available data about the surface. You can use different Contour Maps to map different
properties - such as top depth, layer thickness, and much more.
· If - for the target dataset - you've imported a map of the surface, then that dataset is
available for you. (By default, NeuraSection smoothly interpolates and extrapolates.)
OR
· If - for the target dataset - you have only data from the well logs (e.g., top depths),
then NeuraSection can smoothly interpolate and extrapolate this dataset (done by
default) (for an example, see second figure below).
· In the Contour Properties panel (which automatically opened when you created the new
Surface Map), go to the "Interval" text box (see first figure below).
· Type in the desired value (e.g., "20"). Then click Apply.
· The Contour Map is now automatically generated - smoothly interpolated between
data points.
· From here, the contours can be manually adjusted, by using the Contour Tool (Area
of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).

581
· In the example figure below, the target surface has only a few depth points - measured
in a few different wells. The surface is smoothly interpolated (done by default) - giving
a best-fit surface for the dataset (using the original data as the control points). It's similar
to how you might interpolate by hand (with the help of a compass). From here, the
surface is also extrapolated.
NOTE: In this map, the user has done some things to adjust the properties of the
contours. The respective tools are described in Sections 23.4.2 and 23.7.1.

B
e
s
t
582
 -
f
i
t

s
u
r
f
a
c
e

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
e
d

f
r
o
m

f
e
w

w
e
l
l
s

t
h
a

583
 t

f
o
r
m

c
r
o
s
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
.

T
h
e

o
r
i
g
i
n
a
l

d
a
t
a

a
r
e

584
 t
h
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

p
o
i
n
t
s
.

· SPECIAL NOTE: The data in the Well Log Properties dialog determine the position of a
well on the maps. The official "bottom depth" is determined by the “Total Depth” field
(see Well Header tab). ("Total Depth" is an MD value.) In some cases, for various
technical reasons, the logs and the deviation survey officially extend below the given
Total Depth. In these cases, the location of a picked Top may seem to lie outside the
well path.
· One such example occurs in the figure above; this behavior is further illustrated below.
However, the picked top occurs within the bounds of the deviation survey itself.
Therefore, the picked top follows the deviation survey - even though the bottom-most
part of this survey extends below the official "bottom depth".

585
Edit/Check Map Properties
· Title Block
· Map Layers (GeoTIFF / ArcView Shape / DXF / DWG / Map Image)
· Projection & Scaling
· Fonts/Well Headers/Display

23.4.2 Contour Properties

Upon creating a new Surface Map (see Section 23.4.1) the Contour Properties panel
automatically opens. Otherwise, you can open this panel by going to the Area of Interest (AOI)
ribbon and clicking Contour Attributes.
· To create a Contour Map, type a value into the "Interval" text box, and then click Apply.
· The contours are automatically produced and displayed. Their characteristics are then
displayed in the panel.
· From here, the contours can be manually adjusted, by using the Contour Tool (Area

586
 of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).

· When the first contour is drawn, contour properties are normally set (color, line
thickness, elevation, and font size) to set defaults for each additional contour - until
properties are changed.
· To fill the contours, hold the mouse and drag over the target intervals. Or double click on
each target interval.

For further instructions on using contours, go to Contouring.

23.4.3 Surface Tree Structure

587
23.5 Add Fault Map(s) (of Fault Surfaces)
Adding Fault Maps is similar to adding normal Surface Maps. In the Surface Tree Structure,
Fault Maps are stored under "Fault Map".
IMPORTANT: These maps are for fault surfaces. To draw fault lines on a Surface Map, go to
Section 23.8.

Adding a New Fault Map

· To add a Fault Plane Map, right click on "Fault Map", select the Add Fault Plane
Map, and select your target fault.

588
· This operation creates a new blank map, for the selected fault. This map is listed as an
item under "Fault Map".
· To see the data points from the wells, go to the "Fault Map" list, and right click on your
target fault.

· The data points are now shown. In the figure below, the fault data text were set to
appear in bold purple text.

o For a well with a deviation survey, the position of the data point is circled on the
appropriate part of the well path.

o For a well without a deviation survey, the data text are written under the well symbol
(the point is already "circled" by the well symbol itself).

· NOTE: In the map above, properties were adjusted for the display of wells; such
parameters are described in Section 23.3.1.

589
Adding Contours
· Go to Contour Properties, by clicking Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour
Attributes.
o To create a Contour Map, type a value into the "Interval" text box, and then click
Apply.
o The contours are automatically produced and displayed. (See Contour Properties for
more details.)
· From the data points, NeuraSection creates a best-fit surface. NeuraSection
interpolates within the dataset - and extrapolates outside the dataset.
· From here, the contours can be manually adjusted, by using the Contour Tool (Area
of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· For further instructions about contours, go to Contour Properties.

· NOTE: In the maps above, the user has done some things to adjust the properties of
the contours. The respective tools are described in Sections 23.4.2 and 23.7.1.
Properties were also adjusted for the display of wells; such parameters are described
in Section 23.3.1.

23.6 Add and Edit Faults (Fault Lines on Surface Map)

When drawing Surface Maps, you may have to account for faults that cut through the surface.
You will have to draw the fault lines. Moreover, these faults may affect the contours, and you
may have to manually account for this. This section describes the process of drawing fault lines
on Surface Maps.
· Faults - Drawing
o Simple Faults
o Thrown Faults

590
 · Faults - Editing
· Fault Properties
· Throw/Dip/Heave Properties
· Add Boxcar, Thrust, and/or Slip Symbols
For details on editing contour lines, see Contouring. In particular, see Contours - Breaking &
Slipping Along Faults.

23.6.1 Faults - Drawing

· Simple Faults
· Thrown Faults

23.6.1.1 Simple Faults

Drawing simple faults in NeuraSection is similar to drawing contours, freeforms, or top

profiles. The object is designed to smooth between control points as it is drawn, just as one
would draw with a hand.

Basic Drawing Techniques (Simple Faults)

· First, go to the Surface Map where you want to add fault lines. (For example, in the
Surface Tree, you might select J > Interval Isopach.)
· Activate the Fault Trace Tool (Area of Interest ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click to make control points. These control points form the line. They can be snapped to
other faults.
· Right click on the fault to set the properties .

591
Snapping Fault to Fault
· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click to make control points. Draw towards the fault you would like to snap to.
· The control point will turn into a snap point (small blue rectangle as shown below) when
coming close to the other fault and when the snap process is completed.

592
23.6.6.2 Thrown Faults

NeuraSection can set the throw, dip, and heave of any fault, to help build complex fault
systems. The basic properties are set just as they are for simple faults.
Thrown faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points (one at
each end).

Basic Drawing Techniques (Thrown Faults)

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click to make control points. These control points form the line. They can be snapped to
other faults. (This is just like with simple faults.)
· Right click on the fault and select Throw/Dip/Heave....

593
· For each control point, enter the desired values for Throw, Dip, and Heave. Or click the
up and down arrows.
o Apply Change to ALL - Check this box to have changes in one row apply to all.
o Reverse the fault - Check this box to reverse expanding fault fill. (NOTE: At first, a
fault may expand in width. Then it may contract. In that case, the fault has reversed,
and "Reverse the fault" needs to be check-marked.)
· Click Apply. Then click OK.

594
23.6.2 Faults - Editing

Editing faults in NeuraSection is similar to editing contours, freeforms, or top profiles.

Adding Points to an Existing Fault

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end).)
· Click in the location to place new control point.

Deleting Points on an Existing Fault

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end). )
· Hover the cursor over the point to remove (which turns it red).
· Press Delete.

595
Snapping Both Sides of a Thrown Fault to Another Fault

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the master side of the fault, which makes 'control points' and snap points
visible. (NOTE: Thrown faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will
always includes the fill when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have
only 2 control points (one at each end).)
· Hover the cursor over the target control point (turns red).
· Drag the control point to the position to snap on the other fault. The control point will
turn into a snap point.
· Do the same with the non-master side of the fault - dragging the appropriate endpoint.

Deleting an Existing Fault

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end).)
· Press Delete. For throw faults, the master and non-master side must be deleted
separately.

23.6.3 Fault Properties

When the first fault is drawn, fault properties are normally set (color, line thickness, elevation, &
font size) to set defaults for each additional fault - until properties are changed. (NOTE:
Certain fault properties [color, line thickness, and elevation] can be set from the All Events
dialog, described below.)

596
Line Style
· Style: Set line style.
· Type: Set smooth curve or point-to-point line type.
· Thick: Set line thickness.
· Color...: Set line color.

Fill Style
· Style: Default fill style is ‘hollow’.
· Lithology: Default Lithology fill is 'none'.
If the polygon is not closed, then the fill style or lithology will extend to an invisible line
bridging the endpoints.
· Color...: Fill color.
· Size: Size of the lithology pattern.

Fault Slip
· Left: Slip contours up/down the left side of the fault.
· Right: Slip contours up/down the right side of the fault.
· Hide All Symbols: Hides all boxcar, thrust, & slip symbols on selected fault.

Fault Throw
For use when top profiles are 'broken'.
· Left: 'Slips' contours toward / away from the left side of the fault.

597
 · Right: 'Slips' contours toward / away from the right side of the fault.

Throw/Dip/Heave
· Turns the dialog to the Fault Throw/Dip/Heave dialog (see Throw/Dip/Heave
Properties).

Setting Properties Globally for Existing Faults (Ctrl+Alt+V)

· Right click on the AOI. Select All Events.
· In the All Events dialog, in the list in the lower left corner, select ProfileFault.

23.6.4 Throw/Dip/Heave Properties

· In the All Events dialog, you can right click on a fault and select Properties 'Fault'.
(Or you can right click on a fault in the AOI itself and select Properties…).
· In the Fault Properties dialog, click Throw/Dip/Heave.
· This switches the dialog to the Fault Throw/Dip/Heave dialog.
· Each fault is made of different control points whose throw, dip, and heave can be
individually adjusted. Each is numbered with an index.

598
 · NOTE: At first, a fault may expand in width. Then it may contract. In that case, the fault
has reversed, and "Reverse the fault" needs to be check-marked.

23.6.5 Add Boxcar, Thrust, and/or Slip Symbols

Adding, sizing, multiplying, and deleting fault symbols is simple for any type of fault.
· Adding Fault Symbols
· Sizing Fault Symbols
· Adding Multiple Fault Symbols
· Switching Symbol Throw Side
· Remove One or All Symbols from a Selected Fault

Adding Fault Symbols

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes control points and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end). )
· Right click and select Add/Edit Boxcar, Thrust or Slip Symbol(s).

599
Sizing Fault Symbols
· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes control points and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end).)
· Resize the symbol before duplicating the symbol. This will ensure evenly sized symbols
along the fault.

600
Adding Multiple Fault Symbols
· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes control points and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end).)
· Highlight the symbol. To increase/decrease the number of symbols along the fault,
press the up/down arrow keys. (NOTE: In addition, the number of symbols to be evenly
spaced along the fault can be typed, as long as it’s a single-digit number [use the keys
on the main keyboard - not those on the number pad].)

601
Switching Symbol Throw Side
· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end).)
· Right click and select Switch Symbol Throw Side. All symbols for that fault will jump
to the other side of the fault.

Remove One or All Symbols from a Selected Fault

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Click on the fault, which makes control points and snap points visible. (NOTE: Thrown
faults have 2 sides. One of them is the 'master' - which will always includes the fill
when highlighting to edit. The non-master side will always have only 2 control points
(one at each end). )
· Right click and select Delete Selected Fault Symbol or All Fault Symbols.

23.6.6 Adjusting Contours around Faults

For details on editing contour lines, see Contouring. In particular, see Contours - Breaking &
Slipping Along Faults.

602
23.7 Contouring
· Contour Properties
· Contour Helper
· Contours - Drawing
· Contours - Editing
· Quick Contouring (Fill Between Contouring)
· Contours - Breaking & Slipping (Along Faults)
· Contour QC Tool

23.7.1 Contour Properties - Individual Contour

When the first contour is drawn, then for each additional contour, contour properties are
normally set (color, line thickness, elevation, & font size) to set defaults - until properties are
changed. (NOTE: Certain contour properties [color, line thickness, & elevation] can be set from
the All Events dialog, described below.)
To adjust an individual contour, right click on it and select Properties....

Line Style
· Style: Set line style.
· Type: Set smooth curve or point-to-point line type.

603
 · Thick: Set line thickness.
· Color...: Set line color.

Fill Style
· Style: Default fill style is ‘hollow’.
· Lithology: Default Lithology fill is 'none'.
If the shape is not closed, then the fill style or lithology will extend to an invisible line
bridging the endpoints.
· Color...: Fill color.
· Size: Size of the lithology pattern.

Thickness / Elevation
· The contour may stand for one of the following: thickness of formation or elevation
of formation.

Font
· Font size and color for all contours in the selected map (e.g., elevation map).

Contact Flag
· Optional note in parentheses.

Setting Properties Globally for Existing Contours (Ctrl+Alt+V)

· Inside an AOI, select a map (from the list beside the AOI).
· Right click on AOI and select All Events.
· The All Events dialog opens up.

604
23.7.2 Contour Helper

The Contour Helper is a visual tool to help determine where depths fall between wells within
a surface.
When enabled, the average top depth of the selected surface for all wells containing that data
is posted. The position is interpolated between each well, which helps guide additional contours.
The value to interpolate can be changed by moving the 'slide bar' in the Set the Surface Depth
of Interest dialog. This dialog pops up automatically when the Contour Helper is enabled. If
this dialog gets closed, it can be re-opened any time (see below).

To enable the Contour Helper

· Activate the Contour tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· Right click on the AOI and select Contour Helper.

605
 · NOTE: In the Set the Surface Depth of Interest dialog, the default value is the
average depth of the selected top. The value in the map may differ by 1. This is
because the average in the map is rounded up.

The Set Helper Display Depth feature can also be accessed through the following:
· Right click on the AOI and select Set Helper Display Depth….

23.7.3 Contours - Drawing

Drawing contours in NeuraSection is similar to drawing faults, freeforms, or top profiles.

The object is designed to smooth between control points as it is drawn, just as one would draw
with a hand.

Basic Drawing Techniques

· Activate the Contour Tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· The cursor now has two green squiggly lines. A dotted red line is displayed as you
hover over an object.

606
· Click at different points to draw the line, which creates control points. A point can snap
to a fault. One endpoint can be snapped to the other (after creating the second
endpoint). Or right click in the AOI and select Close Contour (Ctrl+Shft+E).
· Right click on the contour, then set the contour properties in the Contour Properties
panel as shown below.

607
 · Turn off the Contour Tool to complete the drawing of the selected contour. (NOTE: To
draw another contour, re-activate the Contour Tool.)

23.7.4 Contours - Editing

Editing contours in NeuraSection is similar to editing faults, freeforms, or top profiles - with
the addition of sizing and duplicating.

Adding Points to an Existing Contour

· Activate the Contour Tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· Click on the contour, making 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Any
contours crossing over faults will be broken and snapped to each intersection. For a
contour that crosses two faults, clicking the contour makes it break at one fault - then
the remainder must be clicked again to break at the other fault.)
· Hover over a target location to insert a new point. Notice that the cursor turns to a pair
of crosshairs.
· Left click on the target location. A new control point is added. Repeat the process for all
additional control points.
· Once all additional control points are added, turn off the Contour Tool.

608
Deleting Points on an Existing Contour
· Activate the Contour Tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· Click on the contour, making control points and snap points visible. (NOTE: Any
contours crossing over faults will be broken and snapped to each intersection. For a
contour that crosses two faults, clicking the contour makes it break at one fault - then
the remainder must be clicked again to break at the other fault.)
· Hover over the control point to remove. The control point turns red, and the cursor turns
to a 4-way arrow, as shown below.
· Press Delete (on the keyboard).
· After deleting the target control points, turn off the Contour Tool.

609
Re-sizing an Existing Contour
· Activate the Contour Tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· Click on the contour, making 'control points' and snap points visible. (NOTE: Any
contours crossing over faults will be broken and snapped to each intersection. For a
contour that crosses two faults, clicking the contour makes it break at one fault - then
the remainder must be clicked again to break at the other fault.)
· Hover over the control point to adjust. The control point turns red, and the cursor turns
to a 4-way arrow, as shown below.
· Hold down and drag the cursor to change the location of the control point.
· Turn off the Contour Tool once resizing is complete.

610
Duplicating an Existing Contour for Concentric Rings
Many times, contours form concentric rings. NeuraSection makes it easy to duplicate
contours for this purpose.
· Activate the Contour Tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Contour Tool).
· Click on the contour (which makes 'control points' and snap points visible). (NOTE: Any
contours crossing over faults will be broken and snapped to each intersection. For a
contour that crosses two faults, clicking the contour makes it break at one fault - then
the remainder must be clicked again to break at the other fault.)
· Move the cursor to the spot to place the edge of the new concentric ring.
· Press Ctrl + D.
NOTE: If contour elevations have not been set, you will be prompted to enter the current
contour value, as well as the new contour value. Otherwise, you will just be asked to enter the
new contour value.
NOTE: Subsequent duplications made during the same session (i.e., while the Contour
Tool is still open) will continue the interval values stated between the first 2.
NOTE: This feature is meant for relatively regular contours. Highly irregular contours may need
plenty of manual adjustment.

611
23.7.5 Quick Contouring (Fill Between Contouring)

The Quick Contouring tool can be used to quickly add evenly incremented contours between

612
two (2) existing contours.

To use:
· Activate the Fill Between tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Extrapolate
Contours). The Contour Between panel will pop up, as shown below.
· Click on the 1st contour (turns red). The Contour1 Depth under “Bounding Contour
Depths” is automatically populated.
· Click on the 2nd contour (turns red), the Contour2 Depth is automatically populated.

· Upon clicking the 2nd contour, the new contours are automatically generated. The
Interior Contour increment is automatically calculated, but it can be manually modified.
· Click Done. A dialog will ask you to confirm. Click Yes.
· Upon clicking Yes, the contours will be generated with appropriate values, based on the
interval chosen. (NOTE: At this point, the Fill Between tool is deactivated
automatically.)

613
23.7.6 Contours - Breaking & Slipping Along Faults

In a cross section, top profiles are broken and snapped to fault profiles. Likewise, in an AOI,
contours are broken and snapped to faults. This action takes place when one contour is
re-selected that crosses over any fault boundaries.
· Using the Contour tool, select one contour that passes through a fault.
· This causes all the contours touching the same fault to be broken. If depth values
have been set for the contours being broken, they will propagate to the new contours
generated from the 'break'.
· NOTE: For a contour that crosses two faults, clicking the contour makes it break at
one fault - then the remainder must be clicked again to break at the other fault.
· Important: When contours get broken at a fault, the original shapes get distorted to
614
 some extent. It is important to have plenty of control points, to avoid unwanted effects.

· Activate the Fault tool (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Fault Trace).
· Highlight the fault. Right click and select Properties….

615
· Under Fault Slip, the left and right sides of the fault can be slipped forward or
backward. The contour lines shift accordingly.

· Under Fault Throw, the left and right sides of the fault can be thrown up or down.
Again, the contour lines shift accordingly.

616
23.7.7 Contour QC Tool

The QC tool is used to check contouring based upon tops already picked in displayed wells.
For the surface being mapped, red and/or green 'bubbles' will appear on top of each well that
has top data posted. The bigger the 'bubble', the bigger differential between the posted top
location and the drawn contour. The smaller the 'bubble', the smaller the differential between
the posted top location and the drawn contour.

23.8 Generate Map(s)

617
On the maps, data from the project database can be posted for each well, to aid in the
generation of maps. On vertical wells, these data will be posted below the well symbol. With
deviated wells, these data will be posted below the active top surface location.
Other features include the following:
· Add and Edit Contours
· Add and Edit Faults

Top Pick Information

1. Right click on a Top of Formation Map.

2. Select Show [or Hide] Top of Formation Text.
618
 OR
Click on map name to toggle on/off.

Fault Information

1. Right click on a surface in the list (the surface entry itself - not a map listed under the
surface).
2. Select Display Fault Information.

Net ‘Sand’ Information

1. Right click on a Net Sand Map.

2. Select Show [or Hide] Sand Text.

23.9 Merge AOI Maps

NeuraSection allows merging of two Areas of Interest (AOIs).

To merge AOIs
· In the Project Map ribbon, select Merge AOIs.
· Select the 2 Areas of Interest (AOI) to merge from the list in the Map Merge dialog as
shown below, (hold the Control key to multi-select).

619
· Click Merge.
· Enter the new name for the merged AOI. Then click OK.
· A new merged AOI is created, as shown below - enclosing the two original AOIs. (It
also appears in the Map Choice dialog [Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Open AOI].)
o NOTE: The Project Map must be closed in order to refresh it. Only then will you see
the new rectangle (standing for the AOI) in the Project Map. (The AOI itself
automatically opens after being created.)

620
23.10 Volumetrics
NeuraSection can compute the volume under a selected set of contours. This paper
describes the technique used to calculate the volume, as well as some of the limitations of the
algorithm.
The contours must be selected in order from lowest to highest elevation - or highest to
lowest. The elevation values must be monotonically increasing or decreasing - i.e., no
multi-peaked surface.
The area of each contour is calculated using standard planimeter techniques. In the formula
below, the area of the ith contour is denoted as Ai. The elevation of the ith contour is denoted as
Ei. The volume under the selected set of N contours is then calculated using the formula:

This is equivalent to trapezoidal integration.

Contour maps made or imported into in the Area of Interest can be used. From these maps,
the following operations can be performed:
· Select contours and compute the areas.
· Select contours and calculate volumetrics through associated thicknesses - or average
thickness.
· Enter the recoverability for your formation. The program multiplies it with volumetrics to
calculate recoverable reserves.
· Post annotations and create reports.

621
23.10.1 Calculate Contour Areas

1. Open an Area of Interest (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Open AOI).

2. Select Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Volumetrics.
i. Allows you to select closed contours (contours either closed to themselves or closed
to a fault).
ii. If there is a special area you are interested in - that is not represented by a
contour, you can surround the area with a dummy "contour" (with the Contour Tool
[Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Contour Tool]).
3. Click on contour to highlight.

4. You can create a text-file report by clicking the TXT. button. To set the name and path
for the file, click the Filename button (“…”). This text report can be edited and
imported into Excel or another application, for your own calculations. You can also
create an annotation for the map by clicking the Annotate button.

23.10.2 Calculate Oil and Gas Volumes

622
1. Open an Area of Interest (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Open AOI).
2. Select Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Volumetrics.
· Allows you to select closed contours (contours either closed to themselves or closed
to a fault).
3. Click on contours to highlight. At least two contours must be selected to use trapezoidal
integration. For two contours, the interval determines the thicknesses of both segments
(as shown in figure on next page).
· If only one contour is selected, then volume must be calculated from “Constant
Average Thickness”. With this setting, only the largest contour (the one enclosing
the others) needs to be selected (the others will be effectively ignored).

4. You can create a text-file report by clicking the TXT. button. To set the name and path
for the file, click the Filename button (“…”). This text report can be edited and
imported into Excel or another application, for your own calculations. You can also
create an annotation for the map by clicking the Annotate button.

623
Note:
In order to calculate rock volume (volumetrics) of the area selected, the program will multiply
the area by the thickness of the unit. NeuraSection uses the trapezoidal method for the
calculation of volumetrics. This method assumes straight sloped sides between contours and
an extrapolated cap above the highest contour.
For exploration work, you may want to work with a structure map and select an average net
thickness for the contour(s) selected. You may also want to work with a structure map if the
reservoir thickness is greater than or equal to the structural relief. In these cases, the program
will calculate the gross rock volume of a pay zone with a flat base.
If you use this method and go on to calculate reserves, remember to include the net-to-gross
ratio in your recovery. For more detailed production work, you may want to work with a net pay
map and use the contour values associated with the contours. Default units come from the
map and in the US are typically acre-feet (AcFt).

23.10.3 Calculate Estimated Reserves

1. Open an Area of Interest (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Open AOI).

2. Select Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon Volumetrics.
· Allows you to select closed contours (contours either closed to themselves or closed

624
 to a fault).
3. Click on contours to highlight.
4. In the Volume Report panel, click Calc Reserves…. You will see the volume carried
over from the previous step.

5. You can create a text-file report by clicking the .TXT button. To set the name and path
for the file, click the Filename button (“…”). This text report can be edited and
imported into Excel or another application, for your own calculations. You can also
create an annotation for the map by clicking the Annotate button.

Note:
To calculate recoverable reserves, you must provide the recovery from the volume you have
calculated above. Volume times Recovery equals the Recoverable Volume, or Reserves. Units
for recovery in the US are typically barrels/AcFt or mcf/AcFt. Associated gas or liquids can also
be calculated by inputting mcf/bbl or bbl/mcf. Recovery is usually known to the geologist or
engineer for the particular formation characteristics, including the following: porosity, water
saturation, permeability, pressure, depth, formation volume factor, production mechanism, and
possibly other factors.

Bed Sheet

625
Copy and paste your maps, reports, and annotations into a montage to create a bed sheet, to
summarize the reserves at all levels of your project. Export and manipulate the reports in Word
and/or Excel to make a neat summary of your project. Post the summary to the bed sheet or
save it separately.

23.11 Remove Map

An Area of Interest can contain numerous maps. Single maps can be removed without deleting
the entire Area of Interest.
1. Right click on a Map.
2. Select Delete Map.

23.12 Print an Area of Interest (AOI) Map

Maps generated in an Area of Interest can be printed to any network printer/plotter, a JPEG file,
a TIFF file, or copied/pasted into any Windows application. The layers can be printed
independently or with overlays. You may want to first print a draft copy to your office laser or
ink jet printer. NeuraSection printing scales the map to the page size. If needed, you can easily
print your entire map to an 8.5 × 11–inch piece of paper. (NOTE: A map can be copy/pasted
into a cross section and/or another application such as PowerPoint).

To print an Area of Interest

· Select File Print. The Print dialog will pop up.
· Adjust the settings and click OK to print.

626
Printer
· Name: Select any network or local printer/plotter.
· Properties...: Printer/Plotter Properties panel.
· Status: Printer/Plotter status.
· Type: Printer/Plotter selection.
· Where: Printer/Plotter location.
· Paper: Paper selection size.
· Print to file: Check this box to print to a file.
· RTL Printer: Raster Transfer Language: Leave on for HP plotters.
· Pure Black & White: Check this box to print logs in black and white.
· Print All Logs: Check this box to print all open logs.

Document Size
· Width & Height: Print size.
· Scale: Percent scale of document printing.
· Fit To Single Page: With this option checked, the Width, Height, and Scale are
automatically calculated based on page size.
· Tile to [number] x [number] Pages: Number of pages it will take to print the
document at the scale chosen.
· Lock Aspect Ratio: By default, NeuraSection preserves the aspect ratio of your cross
section, map or well log document. This means that if you edit or scale the Width, the
Height is adjusted proportionally, and vice versa. If you do need to change the aspect
627
 ratio for your printed document, you can do so. Simply uncheck the Lock Aspect Ratio
box. The Width, Height, and corresponding Scales will then not be tied together.

Orientation
· Portrait
· Landscape

HP DesignJet Plotter printer

The RTL Plotter option found on the Print dialog will be on by default. RTL, or Raster
Transfer Language, works with the HP plotter to speed up printing and use less memory.

To set the Properties for your HP DesignJet Plotter

· Click the Properties button on the Print dialog to get the Printer Properties panel.
o If you have an HP DesignJet series. Yours may look different, but should have
similar functionality.
o Select the appropriate orientation Portrait or Landscape.
Most cross sections need a landscape orientation because their width is greater than their
length. To verify this, inspect the cross section dimension and aspect ratio printed in the
lower right corner of the NeuraSection display.
If you are using continuous roll paper in your HP plotter, you will need to set the paper size.
You must know the width of your paper, and you will determine the length you want to use.

To determine and enter the paper size

· Make sure the correct paper source has been selected in the Paper source menu on
the printer panel.
· Calculate the paper length you want. Since we have a width of 36 in and an aspect
ratio of 2.213:1, that makes 36 in × 2.213 = 79.65 in. We round up for a length of 80
inches.
· Enter the length. If necessary, press the More sizes button. The information is entered
on the subsequent panel. Then it appears in the Application page size box.
· For landscape printing, select the Zoom Smart option available on most HP Plotters
and make sure the paper size matches the custom size chosen.
· Select OK on the Properties panel.
· Select OK on the Print panel to begin printing.

23.13 Open Existing Area of Interest (AOI)

From Main Menu

628
 · Open an Area of Interest (Area of Interest (AOI) ribbon > Open AOI or File > Open
> AOIs...).
· Select the AOI from the Map Choice dialog. Then click OK.

OR

From Project Map

· Highlight Area of Interest box (turns red).
· Right click Open Area - [AOI Name].

629
23.14 Delete Area of Interest
· In the Home ribbon, select Delete-Data AOIs….

630
 · Select AOI(s) to delete.
· Click Yes to confirm.

23.15 Export Map Data

Contours and Faults created in a mapped Area of Interest can be exported to the following file
types:
· Landmark ZMAP+ ASCII
· Landmark Metafile
· Landmark SeisWorks
· GeoQuest CPS3
· GeoQuest Finder
· DGI EarthVision
· AutoCAD DXF
· AutoCAD 3D DXF
· ArcView Shape
· NeuraMap File
· XYZ Space Delimited
· XYZ Tab Delimited
· XYZ Comma Delimited

631
To export contours and faults

1. Select File Export Map Data....

2. Select data to export, file type, and location to save the file.

3. Click Export.

632
4. While exporting, the export status is shown in the Map Export panel. The Export
Complete dialog appears when export is completed.
5. Click OK. The Map Export panel is put away. The export file is saved in the file path
selected.

633
24 Managing Projects/Database
NeuraSection has various features that make it convenient to manage projects and databases.
For example, it's easy to switch projects and to create backups. There are even tools to
compact and repair Access databases.

24.1 Saving Your Work

634
Individual file(s) used during a NeuraSection work session can be saved as follows:

Save
· File Save... (Ctrl+S) - Saves the current open/active document.

Save As
· File Save As... (Ctrl+Shift+S) - Save a new file or overwrite existing one.

635
Save All
· File Save All... (Ctrl+Shift+A) - Saves ALL current open document(s).
· If any have not been originally saved, you will go to the Save dialog for each unsaved
file.

Save As Image
· File Save As Image .JPG / .TIF / .TFW / .PDF - Can save as JPEG, TIFF,
GeoTIFF, or Adobe PDF.

Project
· File Project Save Project As... - Switch between projects (SQL and/or
Access) seamlessly - and save all the project's associated documents to the database
of choice. (See Switching Projects/Databases).

NOTE: Save, Save As, and Save as Image commands will overwrite an existing file of the same
name.

24.2 Switching Projects/Databases

Working with NeuraSection, users can switch between projects (SQL and/or Access)
seamlessly and save all the project's associated documents to a chosen database.

To save a new project to another database

· File Project Save Project As....
· Click Yes, in to the dialog shown below:

· Select the database (Access or SQL) you want to use in the Save Project As panel
below. (NOTE: For SQL, selecting a server data source is required. When saving from
Access to SQL, the World map.mxd is included).

636
 · Check Include All Files, if desired.
· Under Group Project Dir:, select the path where you want to save your project.
· Enter the name of the New Project.
· Click Save.

To Change to another Project

· Under the Project Explorer, right click on the Project Folder (Project Group). Select
Change Project Group….
· In the Select Project dialog, select the database type (Access or SQL).
· Click the … button to change the Project Group, if desired.
· In the Current Project dropdown, select the target project.
OR
· Select the project in the Project Explorer.
· Click OK.
OR
· Press Alt+C to access the NeuraSection Wizard. This feature remains an option for
users who prefer the older interface.

637
24.3 Deleting a Project
To Delete a SQL Project

NOTE: This only applies to projects in SQL database.

· Go to File Project Delete SQL Project….
· Select a project to delete. (NOTE: The project you want to delete must not be the one
currently open).
· Click Delete Project.

638
24.4 Backup Database (Access/SQL)
Auto Backup
· As an option, if a NeuraSection project (e.g., C:\nds\projects\myproject.mdb) is opened
in an Access database, it can be automatically backed up.
· The backup is made upon exiting the program.
· The backup file is a .bak file, and its filename has the project name plus the name of the
interpreter (e.g. myproject_akb.bak).
· To use this feature, go to File > Preferences. In the Default Settings dialog, and
select the Application radio button. Under the Application Properties list, be sure
"Backup On Exit" is ON. If not, then click to turn on.

639
Manual Backup
Projects can also be backed up at any time.

To Back Up a Project in Access

· Go to File Project Backup to Access (Alt+B).

To Back Up an SQL Project in Access

· Go to File Project Backup to Access (Alt+B).

To use a backup project

· Rename project to that of the original .mdb file (e.g. myproject.mdb).

640
24.5 Compact and Repair Database (Access)
NeuraSection projects are saved as Microsoft Access databases. General maintenance of
project databases is recommended to keep them clean and a manageable size. The Compact
and Repair utility can be done from within NeuraSection. Access is not required.

To Compact and Repair Database

· Select File Project Repair & Compact.

· After finishing the task, a dialog will show the size of the database before and the size
after.

NOTE: Repair & Compact applies only to Access databases.

641
25 Reference
Here is a list of key items for quick reference:

· Ribbons
· Hot Keys
· Neuralog Desktop
· Depth Registering Log Images
· Crop Well Logs
· Cross Sections
· Tops, Bases and Faults
· Adding Deviation Surveys
· Adding Production Test Data
· Zone Fills & Interwell Zones
· Annotations & Graphic Overlays
· Net Count (Sand Count)
· Trace Correlation
· Project Maps & Areas of Interest (AOIs)
· UWI/API Formatting
· Troubleshooting Startup
· License Key # and Type Display

25.1 Ribbons
The menu system of yesteryear has been replaced with a modern ribbon interface. For
details, see Ribbon.
(NOTE: The looks of the icons may vary, depending on your version of NeuraSection or
Neuralog Desktop.)

Home

642
 Project Map

Area of Interest (AOI)

Well/Logs

643
 Correlation

Cross-Section

Help

25.2 Hot Keys

Keys Action Description

644
 Toggle Text Annotation Tool (for files that
Alt+A (twice) Annotations > Text Box allow annotations). (Must press A twice to
activate or deactivate.)

Alt+B Backup Project Backs up the current project to .bak file

Change Project with

Alt+C Opens classic NeuraSection Wizard
NeuraSection Wizard

Alt+D Depth Marker Tool Toggle Depth Marker Tool (for log files)

Alt+E Export Well Data Opens Export Wizard

Toggle Fault Marker Tool

Alt+F Fault Marker Tool
(for logs and cross sections)

Alt+N New Cross Section Set up new Cross Section

Annotations > Insert Toggle Picture Annotation Tool

Alt+P
Picture (for files that allow annotations)

Alt+Q Contour Q/C Tool Toggle Contour Q/C Tool (for AOIs)

Alt+S Selection Tool Toggle Selection Tool

Toggle Top Marker Tool

Alt+T Top Marker Tool
(for logs and cross sections)

Unconformity Marker Tool

Alt+U Unconformity Tool
(for cross sections only)

Alt+Z Zoom In

Alt+Shft+Z Zoom Out

Arranges windows (in the workspace)

Ctrl+A Auto Arrange Windows
into an easy-to-use pattern

Area of Interest (AOI)

Ctrl+Alt+A Toggle AOI Tool (for Project Map)
Tool

Ctrl+Shft+A Save All

645
 Copy what is displayed in the window; copy
Annotation, Contour, or various other
Ctrl+C Copy items. Copied image can be pasted into
another program, or can be pasted as a
Picture Annotation.

Ctrl+Alt+C Contour Tool Toggle Contour Tool (for AOIs)

Opens the Contour Between Panel

Ctrl+Shft+C Extrapolate Contours
(for AOIs)

Ctrl+D Duplicate (Contour) Duplicate Contour in Map (for AOIs)

When an item, such as a fault profile or a

Ctrl+E End Edit contour, is selected for editing, this
command will de-select the item.

Polygons may be Freeform Annotations, or

Ctrl+Shft+E Close Polygon
they may be Contours in an AOI.

Annotations >
Ctrl+Shft+F Freeform Annotations are polygons.
Freeform

Ctrl+L Log List View Opens the Open Log List View window

Ctrl+M Project Map Opens the Project Map

Ctrl+Alt+M Well-Filter Opens Filter Wells Panel

Ctrl+Shft+M Open AOI Opens the Map Choice Panel

Create new Well or Cross Section

Ctrl+N New... through the "New" Panel
(instead of using the File tab).

Ctrl+O Open Wells/Logs

Ctrl+P Print Document

Quick Production Data

Ctrl+Alt+P Opens Quick Production Test Data Panel
Tool

Opens the appropriate Properties Panel

Ctrl+Shft+P Properties
for the active window.

Ctrl+S Save Document

646
 Net Count Tool (used
Ctrl+Alt+S to be called Sand Toggle Net Count Tool
Count)

Opens a panel to save open document as a

Ctrl+Shft+S Save As
new name.

Ctrl+T Trace Tool For tracing a log curve.

Paste a cut or copied item

Ctrl+V Paste
(see Ctrl+C and Ctrl+X).

Ctrl+Alt+V Edit Active Objects Opens All Events Panel

Ctrl+W Close Closes the active window.

Ctrl+X Cut Cuts a selected Annotation or Contour.

Ctrl+Shft+X Open Cross Section Opens the Cross Section Choice Panel

Only a few things can be undone with

Ctrl+Z Undo
Undo.

Ctrl+Alt+Z Fit Width Fits width of file to size of window

Ctrl+End Scroll to Bottom of Log

Ctrl+Home Scroll to Top of Log

Move through open Keep pressing until you reach the window
Ctrl+Tab
documents you want to activate.

Move through open Keep pressing until you reach the window
Ctrl+Shft+Tab
documents in reverse you want to activate.

Keep pressing until you reach the target

N Next Marker
Marker (e.g., Top Marker).

25.3 Neuralog Desktop

647
Neuralog Desktop is an add-on available for NeuraSection. It includes the ArcMap interface.
This interface gives you a single view to better organize, display, and access all your project
data.
Neuralog Desktop allows geoscientists to create, evaluate, and display logs, maps, and cross
sections together within a single application. Users can perform a variety of functions. One
such function is log digitizing (with NeuraLog). Another example is to quickly perform a
complete geological evaluation in NeuraSection (with the on-screen interactive display).
For more details, see Neuralog Desktop - ArcMap Interface Preview.

25.4 Depth Registering Log Images

648
Depth registration of log images is simple. The only calibration rule is that you should place
Depth Markers near the beginning and end of the log track because only the part of the log
image within calibration markers will display in a cross section. To create a cross section, make
sure all the wells you wish to include are open and properly depth registered.
· First, select an open log image associated with a well in the database.
· Scroll the log image to a visible depth near the beginning of the log track.
· In the Well / Logs ribbon, select Depth (shown below), or use the hot key Alt+D.

· Click in the image at a target depth location. The Depth Properties dialog will appear.
· Type in the depth.

For more details, see Depth Register Log Images.

25.5 Crop Well Logs

649
Often, scanned log images will have large areas of white space on either side of the log track.
This white space is not desirable in the cross section because it affects the connection of tops
and their zone fills. To account for this, NeuraSection allows you to crop the edges of the log
images, thus removing the white space for the cross section view.
Remember - cropping a log image does not change the view in the original document window.
It affects only cross section display.
For more details, see:
· Crop Well Logs
· To Crop a Log Image
· Logs with Multiple Runs
· Skewed Logs
· Cropping Log Tracks
· Cropping LAS Files

25.6 Cross Sections

650
 Cross Section Document

NeuraSection has a broad toolset for building, designing, and working with cross sections.
Well logs that appear in a cross section are called XWells. They are made of one or more well
log files. These documents represent the pieces of image and LAS files added to the cross
section.

Cross Section displayed in Project Map

Whenever you create a cross section, its path is plotted onto the Project Map.
NeuraSection offers multiple different methods to create cross sections. This way, the user
can have a method that's the most convenient for a specific situation.
NeuraSection offers a nearly comprehensive range of tools for assembling cross sections -
and using them for interpretation. Some of the key features include the things explored in the
following sections:
· Create, Open, and Preview Cross Sections

651
 · Quick Cross Section
· Working with Cross Sections
o Create & Save a Cross Section
o Cross Section Properties
o XWell Documents
o Presentation Formatting
§ Connecting Tops & Filling Well Zones
§ Connecting Related Faults
§ Structural View and Stratigraphic View
§ Deviated Well Display
o Cross Section Interpretation and Montage
§ Top Profile
§ Top Marker
§ Fault Profile
§ Fault Marker
§ Breaking Top Profiles at Faults
§ Unconformities
§ Facies / Freeform
§ Annotate Cross Sections
§ Add Graphics
o Open Existing Cross Sections
§ Map View
§ Area of Interest
· [Project Map] Right Click Options for Wells and Cross Section Lines

25.7 Tops, Bases, and Faults

652
Tops and bases of layers can be picked and/or adjusted manually.
· To do so, you can click inside a calibrated well log image or LAS document.
· These items can also be adjusted directly on the cross section document.
· Before marking tops and bases, it is recommended you build your (initial) surface list in
the Strat Panel (Project Level Surface Table). Or if another project already has it set up,
you can export the Strat Panel from one project to another. (Although you can create a
cross section without marking tops beforehand, we recommend you do as much work
in advance to prepare the wells. Wells and logs can, however, be easily edited or
added, even after the cross section is created.)

653
Faults are marked in well logs in a similar manner to how top markers are placed.
· Faults may also be added and/or edited from the Cross Section window.

Inside Area of Interest maps (AOIs), you can create Surface Maps and Fault Maps.
· One option is a "Top of Formation" map.
o For a target layer, this option can convert the top picks for each well into a Contour
Map.
o NeuraSection can automatically interpolate and extrapolate the given data -
creating a best-fit surface. From here, this surface can be manually adjusted.
· For an AOIs, the surfaces correspond to tops in the Project Level Surface Table (Strat
Panel) plus faults picked on the logs. These surfaces are listed beside the AOI, in a
structure called the Surface Tree.
· Below is an example of how to add a Map to a Surface - and then automatically
generate a best-fit Contour Map from the provided data. There are a great number of
maps to choose from. Four of the options are "Top of Formation", "Interval Isopach",
"Oil Volume", and "Gas Volume". You can also add your own Surface Map types.

654
 · Fault Maps are maps of fault surfaces. These are made similarly to Surface Maps.
· To draw fault lines on a Surface Map, see the entry below.

When drawing Surface Maps, you may have to account for faults that cut through the surface.
· You will have to draw the fault lines.
· Moreover, these faults may affect the contours, and you may have to manually account
for this.

For convenient reference, here is a list of sections and sub-sections relating to Tops, Bases,
and Faults:
· Marking Tops and Bases
· Marking Faults
· Zone Fills
· Strat Bar and Interpreters
· Working with Cross Sections
o Connecting Tops & Filling Well Zones
o Connecting Related Faults
o Top Profile
o Top Marker
o Fault Profile

655
 o Fault Marker
o Breaking Top Profiles at Faults

· Area of Interest (AOI) - Gridless Mapping

o Add Surface Map(s)
o Contouring
§ Contours - Breaking & Slipping Along Faults
o Add and Edit Faults (Fault Lines on Surface Map)
o Volumetrics

25.8 Adding Deviation Surveys

By loading deviation surveys, wells can be more accurately displayed in Cross Sections, the
Project Map, and Areas of Interest (AOIs).
In the Well Properties dialog, the Deviation tab lets you enter, delete, or simply view deviation
information about a well. More information on cross section display options can be found
under Cross Section Properties.

To manually add/edit deviation surveys, you have the following options: typing, Copy/Paste,
deleting line(s) of data, and unloading/disabling surveys.
For more details, see:
· Deviation Tab
· Manually Add/Edit Deviation Survey

656
25.9 Adding Production Test Data
In the Well Properties dialog, the Production Display tab is used to select the imported
production test data to be posted on your well log. Perforation (PERF), Drill Stem Test (DST),
Core, Well Cum, Shows and Initial Potential (IP) may be manually entered. Or they can be
imported from GeoGraphix WellBase V2, GeoGraphix WellBase V3, GeoGraphix WellBase
V4, IHS Energy Well Fixed 197, IHS Energy Well Fixed 297, MJ Systems LogSleuth Logs,
Excel, or Tabbed ASCII into the database and posted on your wells/cross sections.
Important: Images must be calibrated in order for the data to be posted.

The Production Data tab is used to add new test data and list or delete existing production test
data. To display each list, simply choose the desired type from the dropdown menu. If no data
exists for a certain production test data type, (NA) will be posted next to it. The checkmarks
signify the data being displayed on the well (if present).

657
NeuraSection offers a variety of tools that let you easily add production test data by hand,
including the following:
· Perforations (PERF)
· PERF properties
· PERF list
· Drill stem tests (DST)
· DST properties
· DST list
· Initial Potential (IP)
· IP properties
· IP list
· Core data (CORE)
· CORE properties
· CORE list
· Shows (SHOW)
· SHOW properties
· SHOW list

In addition, NeuraSection offers the Quick Production Test accelerator.

For more details on adding production test data, see the following sections:
· Production Display Tab

658
 · Production Data Tab
· Manually Add/Edit Production Test Data

25.10 Zone Fills & Interwell Zones

Well Zones

For presentation purposes, you may fill the zones within your well logs. These zones will then
become part of your final Cross Section presentation. NeuraSection provides a very simple
mechanism for filling zones, and it provides several tools to customize these fills.
Again, Zone Fills appear in both Cross Sections and Well Logs. Below is a figure showing what
they look like, in both such documents:

Zone Fills in Cross Sections and Well Logs

You can apply Zone Fills to all tops at once (as shown above). Or you can apply them to
individual tops (as shown below).

659
Interwell Zones

Interwell Zones are a special feature for Cross Sections. These items are like Well Zones -
except they are the areas between wells (areas between lines connecting tops between wells).

660
It’s also possible to fill an individual Interwell Zone.

For more details, see:

· Top Properties
· Zone Fills
· Cross Section Well Order/Information (Well Info Tab)
· Connecting Tops & Filling Well Zones
· Removing or Hiding Connecting Tops & Zone Fills

25.11 Annotations & Graphic Overlays

661
Annotations may be added to Well Logs or Cross Sections at any time. Annotations can also be
added to Project Maps and Areas of Interest (AOIs).
For annotations/graphics associated with specific wells, we recommend they be marked on
each well document. This way, they can be carried between Cross Sections and Projects.

To add a Text Annotation

To add a Text Annotation, go to the appropriate ribbon: Project Map, Area of Interest (AOI),
Well / Logs, or Cross-Section. Then select Annotations > Text Box.
Left click where you wish to place the annotation. The Annotation dialog will pop up.

You can edit an annotation by right clicking on it and selecting Properties... (to access the
Annotation dialog; also see Annotation Properties). Or you can double click.
For more details, see Sections Annotate Well Logs, Annotate Cross Section, and Annotation
Properties.
Additional feature for Well Logs: In the Well Log Properties, the Log Text tab has a
breakdown of all Text Annotations added to a log (TIF/LAS log documents). For each Text

662
Annotation, all properties in the table can be edited from this tab. Text can also be edited
directly on the log by using the Text Annotation tool (see above). For more details, see Log
Text Tab.

To add a graphic file to a Well Log, Cross Section, Map, or AOI:

1. Drag and drop from Windows Explorer.

2. Browse for graphic through the Annotation Tool. Go to the appropriate ribbon: Project
Map, Area of Interest (AOI), Well / Logs, or Cross-Section. Then select Annotations >
Insert Picture or Insert Symbol or Lithology.
The following graphic types can be added: .wmf, .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .img, .emf, and .dib.

Engineering and Geological Metafile Symbol Set

Upon installation of NeuraSection's Program Files, a \Metafiles folder was created under your
\nds directory. This folder contains four basic symbol sets (Basic Drawing, Engineering,
Geological Modifers, and Lithologies) - plus six USGS symbol sets (Glacial and Periglacial
(Series 500), Igneous (Series 300), Misc and Metamorphic (Series 400), Sedimentary (Series
200), Sedimentary Lithology (Series 600), and Surficial (Series 100)).
These symbols are easily added to your Well Logs or Cross Section. (Note: You are not
restricted to using the included symbol sets. Any .bmp, .wmf, .emf, and/or .jpg can be added to
any NeuraSection document.)

Examples: , ...

To add/edit a Freeform

The Freeform tool allows you to draw any shapes you want. For example, it can be used to
color pay zones directly on your Well Logs or in your Cross Section. (Note: Anything drawn or
annotated on a Well Log can be used in any other Cross Section or Project.)
To use this tool, go to the appropriate ribbon: Project Map, Area of Interest (AOI), Well / Logs,
or Cross-Section. Then select Annotations > Freeform.
For annotations/graphics associated with specific wells, we recommend they be marked on
each well document. This way, they can be carried between Cross Sections and Projects.
For more details, see sections Freeform Drawing and Facies / Freeforms.

663
25.12 Net Count (Sand Count)
A net-count symbol allows you to highlight and measure a sand interval - or an interval for
some other lithology or rock property. In earlier versions of NeuraSection, "net counts" were
known as "sand counts". These symbols are rectangles, and you can draw them much like a
normal rectangle.
First, make sure the Well Log is depth calibrated. Then follow the instructions in Create and
Set Net Count Properties.

664
In addition, NeuraSection offers the option to display all net counts (sands) as zones. There are
separate settings for logs and for cross sections.
For more details, see the instructions in Display ALL Net Counts (Sands) as Zones.

665
666
 (
N
O
T
E
:

T
h
e

a
b
o
v
e

r
i
g

667
 h
t

c
l
i
c
k

m
e
n
u

i
s

f
o
r

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
a
l

c
r
o
s
s

s
e
c
t
i
o

668
 n
.

T
h
e

r
i
g
h
t

c
l
i
c
k

m
e
n
u

f
o
r

S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
i
c

c
r

669
 o
s
s

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

l
o
o
k
s

s
l
i
g
h
t
l
y

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
.
)

To make things even easier, NeuraSection offers a way to select all "like sands (net counts)",
i.e., all symbols of the same type. Furthermore, you can align all "like sands" together (by their
left edges), and you can set all of them to the same widths.
For more details, see the instructions in [Net Count] Align, Set Width, and/or Change Color of
Selected Data Type.
You can also edit various properties of Net Counts (Net Sands) in the Well Log Properties

670
dialog. You can display, create, edit, and delete net sand/pay values for each formation and
sand data type defined on the well (can be imported or manually entered). Data types include
the following:
· Sand
· Limestone
· Gas
· Oil
· Porosity
· Porosity %
· Shale
· Mudstone
· Salt
· Igneous/Volcanic
· Anhydrite/Gypsum
· User Specified
In the Well Log Properties dialog, under the Sand Display tab, you can access the
rectangles you've already added.

671
For more details, see the instructions in Sand Display Tab.

IMPORTANT: Net Values entered directly in the Well Properties dialog (rather than edits to
properties of a rectangle that was initially drawn) WILL NOT display on the log but WILL POST
on an AOI. If sands are then marked on the log, the 'well' net (denoted with an *) will be
overridden in the table and in the AOI. However, they will reappear if you delete the Net Count
(Sand) that you drew.

672
673
25.13 Trace Correlation
The Trace Correlation tool may be used to help correlate your logs. Afterward, the trace
results can be turned into freeforms. Traced curve is temporary unless it is turned into a
freeform.
To trace a section of curve, go to the Correlation ribbon and select Trace. From there, follow
the directions in Using the Trace Correlation Tool.

Afterward, you can use the traced curve segment to make easy comparisons with curves in
other logs. Follow the directions in Correlating with a Curve Trace. (NOTE: In this figure, there
is a yellow Net Count, which causes the Trace Correlation box to become somewhat
camouflaged.)

674
To convert to a freeform, go to Correlation Tracer properties dialog. Select Copy Curve to
FreeForm. Again, follow the directions in Using the Trace Correlation Tool.
To learn about Trace Correlation properties, go to Trace Correlation Properties.

25.14 Project Maps & Areas of Interest (AOIs)

Project Maps

675
To aid in the selection of wells to be loaded from a project, NeuraSection provides a Project
Map of the wells in the database. For Project Map to be effective, you must already have your
well database established with LAT/LON information. This is normally done by importing data
from another source such as WellBase. Once this is done, the wells are easily selected using
the Project Map.
NOTE: The wells must have latitudinal and longitudinal information to appear in the Project
Map. Wells without LAT/LON data will appear in the list below the map as grayed entries but
are still selectable from the list.
The Project Map will make it easier for you to select wells geographically. When the view is
first loaded, the well spots appear with well status symbols. Deviated wells are shown with
surface and bottom hole locations. By default, the map does not display well information.
Project Map properties may be set and saved to customize the map by project. To enhance the
view, you may display well information - as well as ArcView Shape files (.shp) saved with
LAT/LON information.

676
For the details, go to Project Map.

Areas of Interest (AOIs)

NeuraSection's Area of Interest is a multi-dimensional mapping document. Within a defined

area (AOI), multiple maps can be generated, printed, saved and, exported - for multiple
formations in the active project. Data from the database (Formation Tops, Fault Information,
Net Counts, etc.) can be displayed in the AOI. Mapping and quality-control tools are user
friendly, to help generate quick maps.
(NOTE: NeuraMap NDS files [contours and simple faults] can be imported into an existing
Area of Interest, or a new AOI will be created from the extents of the NeuraMap file.)
For the details, go to Area of Interest (AOI) - Gridless Mapping.

25.15 UWI/API Formatting

NeuraSection has ability to display formatted API/UWI. Format is fully customizable and
supports multiple delimiters.

To activate API/UWI formatting:

· Select File Preferences

· Select Project Well UWI/API Length

677
 · Click on Select
· Check Display Dashes
· Preview of formatted API/UWI is displayed below

API/UWI format is defined in config.json file, by “UWI Format” entity. Default format, included
with installation, matches 14 char US API code as “XX-XXX-XXXXX-XX-XX”.

To edit API/UWI format:

· Open config.json file, installed in the res directory in NeuraSection's installation folder
(e.g. c:\nds\res).
· Scroll to “UWI Format” entity which is formatted as semi-column (;) delimited string with
5 sub-strings.
Following is an example for 14 char US API “XXXXXXXXXXXXXX” formatted as
“XX-XXX-XXXXX-XX-XX”
"UWI Format": "\\A(\\d{2})[- ]?(\\d{3})[- ]?(\\d{5})[- ]?(\\d{2})[-
]?(\\d{2})?\\z;\\1-\\2-\\3-\\4-\\5;dd ddd ddddd dd dd;__-___-_____-__-__;\\1\\2\\3\\4\\5"
o First sub-string indicates length of each section between delimiters and delimiter
character(s)
\\A(\\d{LEN1})[D1 ]?\\d{LEN2})[D2 ]?\\d{LEN3})[D3 ]?... \\d{LENn})[Dn ]?\\z

678
 Where:
LEN1, LEN2, LEN2, … LENn – length of each section
D1, D2, D3, …Dn – Delimiter for each section
o Second sub-string describes delimiters after each section in order 1,2,…n
\\1D1\\2D2\\3D3...\\nDn
Where:
D1,D2,D3, …Dn – Delimiter for each section
o Third sub-string describes UWI format mask without separators
dd ddd ddddd dd dd
Where:
“d” indicates position and length of the characters from UWI
o Fourth sub-string describes mask of delimiters
__-___-_____-__-__
Where:
“_” indicates positions of the characters from UWI
“-“ indicates position of a delimiter and delimiter(s)
o Fifth sub-string describes UWI without delimiters. It should be formatted as
\\1\\2\\3..\\n

When setting up UWI format entity in config.json make sure that:

· Number of sections match in all 5 sub-strings
· Order and delimiter characters match in all 5 sub-strings
· Number of sub-strings in the line has to be 5
· Total number of characters in all substrings match UWI length. Otherwise, formatting
will fail and displayed will be original UWI, as saved in the project.

Examples:
· Canadian DLS UWI
100/15-01-010-06W4/00
"UWI Format": \\A(\\d{3})[/ ]?(\\d{2})[- ]?(\\d{2})[- ]?(\\d{3})[- ]?(\\d{4})[/
]?(\\d2)?\\z;\\1/\\2-\\3-\\4-\\5/\\6;ddd dd dd ddd dddd
dd;___/__-__-___-____/__;\\1\\2\\3\\4\\5\\6
· US 12 character API
“XX-XXX-XXXXX-XX”
"UWI Format": "\\A(\\d{2})[- ]?(\\d{3})[- ]?(\\d{5})[- ]?(\\d{2})[- ]?\\z;\\1-\\2-\\3-\\4;dd ddd
ddddd dd;__-___-_____-__;\\1\\2\\3\\4

25.16 Troubleshooting Startup

If NeuraSection fails to start, verify the items listed below are correctly set. See the
679
installation notes for more detail.
· The hardware and software licenses should be properly installed. Make sure the dongle
(if required) is properly plugged into the USB port, the driver is installed and the
license.dat file is in your installation directory (i.e., C:\nds\license.dat).
· NOTE: If running a floating license, please refer to the installation guide.
· NDS_HOME and NDS_PROJECTS should be set in the workstation registry.
NDS_HOME holds the path to where NeuraSection is installed and the license file can
be found. NDS_PROJECTS holds the path of your working project directory. These
settings can be verified or re-set by checking 'Client Setup' only from the installation
CD.
· Microsoft Access (ODBC) Drivers should be installed. These drivers allow NeuraSection
to work interactively with the Access database used to store project information.
· The data sources NLIDynamic and NLIVC should exist and hold the correct file paths.
These variables hold the name and location of the active project database and the static
database, respectively.
If you suspect the software is not set up correctly, try running the program WsSetUp.exe. The
WsSetUp folder can be found on your Neuralog CDROM.

25.17 License Key # and Type Display

To update NeuraSection and other Neuralog products over the web, you must provide your
License Key Number (Key ID). The key number and license file path are displayed in File
Info. (To access the File menu, you must enter the main window - done by clicking Project
Explorer in the startup panel.) In addition, this panel contains information about network keys
(displays total number of licenses and how many are checked out) and the user's active project
database.

680
681
26 Technical Support
Website: https://www.neuralog.com/neurasection-support/

Email: [email protected]
Phone: 1-281-240-2525

682